Home

Workbench User Manual

1. Fig 79 Tie Line Editor To add a Tie Line 1 Sele ct a Router Controller 2 Click on the Add new tie line button and set the following information Column Name Auto Group Start Matrix Start Level Start Dest End Matrix End Level End Source Description The name that identifies the Tie Line Defines whether a tie line is used automatically or not Allocates tie lines to a specific group to ensure that routes are available in smaller sub sections For example if n operators must link to their local monitors there must be n 1 groups to make sure that each operator has a set number of available tie lines for their use regardless of how many tie lines the other operators are using The matrix on the router from which the signal originates The level from which the signal originates The destination from which the signal originates The matrix to which the signal is to be sent The level to which the signal is to be sent The source to which the signal is to be sent Table 27 T ie Lines Configuration 3 Click Apply to save the Tie Line configuration Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 91 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 7 7 UMD Device An Under Monitor Display shows the name of a destination a static text or a dynamic source name The UMD can connect either through serial or IP connection depending on the type The UMD Device driver configures text
2. Type Aurora w Type2330 ze Controller Name Controller1 A Fig 208 Aurora Nebula Importer F 4 Importing a Database 1 Select the type of database from the drop down list Aurora or Nebula 2 Select the type of controller from the drop down list Type2330 or Type2450 3 Type a Controller Name If the controller already exists a prompt displays inquiring whether to overwrite use a default name or cancel the import 4 Click Import Browse to the location of the legacy configuration file Nebula files have the extension ne1 ne2 and so on Aurora files have a aur extension 5 Click Open The controller is imported into Workbench see Fig 209 Aurora Nebula Importer EIS This utility allows you to import configuration from a legacy database into an MCM database Attempting to open C Documents and Settings PeterCadogan Desktop Centra_Workbench Source Material TVE 53 19 JAN 09 3 A OpenFile succeeded P databaseID 0 GetConfig succeeded MatrixCount 4 GetPanels 0 succeeded GetPanels 1 succeeded GetPanels 2 succeeded GetPanels 3 succeeded GetPanels 4 succeeded GetPanels 5 succeeded GetPanels 6 succeeded GetPanels 7 succeeded GetPanels 8 succeeded GetPanels 9 succeeded GetPanels 10 succeeded GetPanels 11 succeeded GetPanels 12 succeeded GetPanels 13 succeeded GetPanels 14 succeeded SR
3. d H 2 Fig 162 Mnemonic Keypad If both the upper and lower text fields have been entered when setting up the mnemonic buttons the upper text is used for the first press in a sequence and the lower text for remaining button presses in the same sequence Page 162 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 10 1 2 Shuffling The shuffling controls are used to replace existing embedded audio channels on a video stream with audio channels from the mixer or from a discrete audio stream Also existing embedded channels may be reorganized The output channels Ch 1 to Ch 16 display in columns across the screen Within each channel column an input channel is selected via a radio button Each output channel can have only one input However an input can be output to a number of channels if required Before selecting the input channel the audio type must be defined for example embedded 00909909R NNHNNNNMH Q 2 909 on Geo won a Q A Q de Q a Q O Q o Q o Fig 163 Shuffling Controls To shuffle a channel 1 Click on the appropriate audio type button of a channel See Table 40 2 Click the radio button for the number of the audio channel to shuffle to Source Audio Destination Audio Embedded Embedded Processed Audio Xpt Mixer Mixer Silence Silence Table 40 Shuffle Audio Types All channels may be selected deselected
4. 2 Video Gain Too High with Enable La m Property Editor en ai aie Nothing selected Actions IX e RR A X Weg ee A Fig 118 Rules Editor Design View 7 2 Rules Editor The Rules Editor lists the available Rules To select which rules are in operation select or clear the Enabled checkbox The rules in operation can also be set from the Rules Service See Rules Service on page 135 To add a new Rule 1 Open the Rules Editor tab at the bottom right of the window 2 Right click on the Rules folder and select Add New Folder To rename the Folder click in the folder name and type directly into the name field 3 Right click on the new folder and select Add New Rule To rename the Rule click in the Rule name and type directly into the name field 4 To edit the new Rule double click on the Rule The Rule displays in the Logic Diagram Editor By default the editor shows a single Output Page 128 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Rules 7 3 Toolbar 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 1 1 7 4 1 2 Issue 1 Rev 4 Table 33 lists the toolbar buttons Button Description Save Saves the changes to the current rule Export Exports the rule as a rules language file or a raw XML file Import Imports a rule from a rules language file or a raw XML file EN a 5 Displays the following editors e Rules Editor e Property E
5. 0 000 ee eens 149 A2 Add BURON 122 usar dado anaes fede beter ane b eae Ma eee 149 A 2 6 Move ButtonS n n oe ceed AE E EE ee EN bw e 150 A 2 7 Assign a Source and Destination to Each Button 150 A 2 8 Add Buttons to Link Panel 150 A 3 Alarm Sof SA 151 A 3 1 Create New Screen naana eee eee nee 151 A 3 2 Modify Screen Properties 151 A 3 3 Modify Panel Properties 0 0 00 eee 151 A 3 4 Modify Group Behavior 0 0 0 eee 152 A 3 5 Add an Image Tahv eee eee 152 Eo lo GLAD A 153 A 3 7 Add More Image Tallies 153 A 4 Live Renaming of Sources and Destinations 154 AS NUMenC COnUONS escri ponla pis rra oras baaa 155 A6 Radi ee CEET 155 AT MONNOF lu tee CEET 157 A 7 1 Add Monitor Buttons to an XY Panel 197 A 7 2 Monitoring on an XY Panel 157 A 7 3 Monitoring on a Dial up Panel 0 0 0 0 cee eee 158 A 8 Destination Follow det EE EE EE E ria ELE 159 A 9 Configure a MultiViewer 2 0 0 0 eee ees 160 A 10 Audio and Video Routing and Processing 161 A 10 1 Audio Processing 2 0 00 eee eee ene 162 PAG Plame EE EE 167 A103 ROUINO EEN 168 A 11 Audio Reference n n ee enana EE pere 170 A 12 Logging Configuration 0 0 0 ee eee eens 171 ATS Mimie Diagrams EE 173 AAA 173 ESO 019 ge RE sata E phone hee e REES 174 A 13 3 Router Mats 174 A 13 4 Re entrant Devices 0 0 eee ees 174 A 13 5 Setup a Mimic Soft Panel 175 A 14 Ro
6. Edit Logical Sources Edit Logical Destinations Reset Force Reset of This Card Force Reset of Other Card Close Fig 64 Nucleus 2450 Controller Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 68 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 5 5 6 1 9 5 6 2 www snellgroup com Configuration The Nucleus 2450 controller can be fitted to Pyxis Cygnus and Sirius 800 range of routers If Workbench is not connected to the Nucleus card the auto configuration option cannot be used In this case these settings can either be entered manually or copy and paste the configuration from a spreadsheet Auto Configuration In the Configuration section the Reference drop down list specifies the reference control type If the Nucleus card is controlling a Cygnus router set it to TCygnusReferenceControl for anything else set it to TGeneralReferenceControl Auto Configure and Auto Configure Video The auto configure option is used to configure the settings for the Nucleus controller To auto configure the settings connect to the controller and click the Auto Configure Video button Workbench configures these settings based on the detected physical inputs outputs and modules These read back from the matrix the ports and modules installed and update the configure port and modules Auto Configure Video also populates the logical to physical source and destination tables lt configures them to all be of type vide
7. A Te By OP Fig 120 Select DCCP Field It is possible to copy the OID and paste it into the relevant DCCP behavior of another control Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 130 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Rules 7 4 2 Operators The logical operators are e Lookup A lookup driver must be present on a controller Add a lookup table with sensible input and output values and then associate the lookup block with this driver The block translates its input to an output based on the data in the table e Changed If the input value changes the Rule is fired e Delay The input value must remain the same for at least the value set in the delay in seconds For example if the delay is set to three seconds the input must not change within that time The following operators can have multiple inputs e Is Equal To All input values must equal the set value e Greater Than All input values must be greater than the set value e Less Than All input values must be less than the set value The Equal To Greater Than and Less Than actions can be set to either compare a Threshold value a set value or to Compare with each other boolean Fig 121 Shows an example of two methods that return TRUE when both inputs equal 10 Gg Compare Threshold m E em Y Compare With Each Other Fig 121 Compare Examples The following logical operators are placed after to the right of an Is Equal To Gr
8. COM 5 is used for hardware control panels in the sample router databases Hardware panels can be connected to any port and COM 5 may be used in the same way as other ports The Local Control port and IP ports may be renamed Serial ports cannot be renamed Rear Panels Workbench bes Sirius Cygnus Pyxis COM 3 Port 1 Port 1 COM 4 Port 2 Port 2 COM 5 Port 3 Port 3 COM 6 Port 4 None Table 12 Com Ports Example e To update the list of available ports click Interrogate Port The list of ports is not automatically updated To ensure that the list is up to date manually interrogate the ports If the controller is not connected the interrogation does not work To add a port 1 Select a COM port from the list of available ports and click Add The port displays in the Configured Ports column 2 Highlight the port in the Configured Ports column 3 Define the port properties according to whether it is serial or IP For Serial port configuration see Table 13 For IP port configuration see Table 14 4 Click Apply to save changes Workbench does not automatically verify that COM ports are not in use The following table shows the default electrical setup of the serial IP based communication protocols for Workbench Protocol Baud Data Parity Stop RS422 Port Mode Rate Bits Bits General Switcher In 38400 8 EVEN 1 Device General Switcher Out 38400 8 EVEN 1 Controller General Remote In 38400 8 NONE 1 Device General Remo
9. Hardware Config Additional configuration required when using a Nucleus 2450 controller in a router See Hardware Config on page 68 Local Router Hardware Additional configuration required when using a 246x controller in a router see Local Router Hardware on page 72 Generic Controller Configuration Editors advanced configuration Used to edit a controller using a logical tree structure format See Controller Configuration Editors on page 93 5 5 Configuring a Router To access the Configuration screen log in as a user with Configuration permissions see section 4 3 To configure a router 1 Select the controller and either double click or click the Edit Controller Config button The Controller Configuration screen displays Click on the Routers tab Ta Controller Configuration o m Routers Local Router Hardware Generic Test 2462 Controller IP Address 127 0 0 12 Port 2007 S850V Source associations 998 Names Test 2462 Controller Basic Configuration Router Configuration Destination associations 1679 Video 768 sources 1292 destinations Associations Level 2 32 sources 32 destinations Level 3 32 sources 32 destinations Port configuration Lewel 4 32 sources 32 destinations y Advanced Configuration Source associations 17376 Destination associations 16848 Audio 17376 sources 168
10. In instances where a signal that comprises more than one physical destination such as the left and right channels of a stereo pair logical destinations are used to identify that they should be routed together Logical destinations can be made up of between one and six physical outputs If the auto configure option is used the logical destinations are automatically set up To manually configure logical destinations 1 Inthe Number of Destinations text field type the required number of logical destinations and then click Apply The specified number of logical destinations is added to the table 2 For each logical destination select the signal type from the drop down list and then enter the physical outputs that are comprised by the logical destination in the Phy 1 to Phy 6 fields Continue adding the logical destinations in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click Apply or OK Page 80 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Derived References To configure Derived References offline 1 Click Edit Derived References to define internal references derived from the physical reference inputs 2 Select the Input reference from the drop down list This will either be a physical input via BNC or a reference that is derived from another input select the required derived reference from the drop down list Select the required reference for audio fr
11. Pairs within an AES group or MADI output stream can be asynchronous to each other and can be different sample rates to each other when they enter the sample rate conversion process The output from the sample rate conversion can be locked to the AES reference input or one of the four physical video reference inputs e f no reference signal is present on the selected reference input all the SRCs on output using that reference input will be free running and locked together They will not be locked to the free running SRCs on the other outputs that are using the same reference Dolby Signals Dolby signals must be routed as a synchronous AES pair The Dolby signal will automatically bypass the SRC even if the pair is selected for sample rate conversion Any reference locking is achieved by dropping or repeating Null samples in the guard band Reference lock only mode A group of pairs or a MADI stream can be locked to the AES reference or one of the four physical video reference inputs without sample rate conversion being enabled e f no reference signal is present on the selected reference input all the SRCs on output using that reference input will be free running and locked together They will not be locked to the free running SRCs on the other outputs that are using the same reference AES If channels within a pair are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on the right channel to match the left channel
12. The following modes are available from the Workbench home screen Run displays a new window and displays the interactive screen that has been designed and configured in Workbench Design provides the features for constructing interactive panels and screens setup the various controllers necessary for screen interaction and Configuration Control of the associated hardware Administration define the user privileges and role settings Rules define rules that must be fulfilled before actions can be taken capture information on system setup devices their inputs and outputs Architecture the cables linking them together and information on the controllers controlling them Table 4 Home Screen Modes e Click on the Snell logo ech at the top right corner of the home screen to open a window displaying the software version and links to other useful information Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 32 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com General Operation 3 1 2 Mode Windows 3 1 2 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 The layout of the mode windows is such that a main working area is displayed on the left of the screen and menus or dockable editor windows and tabs relating to that particular mode are located to the right of the main working area Docking Windows Arrange the dockable editors and tabs in Workbench to suit your working practices Editors can either be floating windows or docked in different positions around the working area If
13. 1 Select one or more buttons and from the property window change the Behavior from Passive to Source The color of the buttons change to green 2 For each source button in turn click the Source Association drop down list and select a Source A 1 1 8 Add Destination Buttons 1 To create the destination buttons either repeat the steps for creating the source buttons or copy and paste the source buttons then change the properties Copies of buttons do not retain their labels 2 Select one or more buttons and from the property window change the Behavior to Destination The color of the buttons change to blue 3 For each destination button in turn click the Destination Association drop down list and select a Destination A 1 1 9 Adda Take Button A Take button confirms the selection of a source and destination 1 From the toolbox at the bottom of the screen select the Button control and place a single button on the screen 2 Change the Behavior from Passive to Take The color of the button changes to red A 1 1 10 Adda Tally A Tally is a label that confirms that an action has been done 1 From the toolbar click the Label control Add a label below one of the destination buttons and resize it so that it is the same width as the button 2 Either add labels to the other buttons or copy the label and paste it below the other destination buttons 3 Select the labels and from the property window change the Behavior
14. A 3 KE SA Fig 7 Multiple Matrix Multiple Levels Page 12 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Introduction 1 5 Protocols Workbench control systems employ a large number of native and third party protocols The following Snell protocols are used in Workbench systems DCCP The Device Configuration and Control Protocol is the primary IP protocol used to configure and control hardware from Workbench General Switcher SW P 02 Available on RS232 RS422 or Ethernet in most routers and is used by 2330 serial router ports for direct control of a router by numerical source and destination Also router status can be interrogated for missing or faulty modules General Remote SW P 08 Available on RS232 RS422 or Ethernet for communication with a control system or interfacing with automation third party in some cases Allows interrogation of source and destination names and supports all on line editor messages and diagnostics Multidrop SW P0 6 RS422 for communication with a control system allowing up to 16 devices from one multi drop string A range of BPX Dial up and LCD panels can be connected to the system UMDs are not directly supported Page 13 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 Installation 2 1 System Requirements The Workbench software can run with any screen resolution However a resolution of 1920 x 1080 is r
15. Opens the Key Sequences Editor See Key Sequences on page 121 Enlarge the panel to the full size of the Screen See Screens on page 108 Opens the Auto Edit dialog box See Auto Edit on page 124 Adds a new tab when a tab is selected Removes the current tab when a tab is selected Add a new panel template when a panel is selected Move the current selection to the back of the screen Move the current selection one step backwards to behind the next most forward item Move the current selection to the front of the screen Move the current selection one step forwards to in front of the next most forward item Opens the Property window for the current selection Opens the Property window for the Screen Opens the Property window for the Group A screen is a container for one or more panels Each screen must have at least one Soft Panel or Hardware Panel see section 6 5 The Worked Examples provide guidelines See Appendix A To create a new screen select one of the following e Create a new blank screen and add panels and controls from the toolbar see section 6 4 1 e Select a panel from the Screens Editor tab make a clone of it and configure the new version as required see section 6 4 2 The screens listed in the Screens Editor tab are part of the Example Resources option of the Workbench installation e Create a new Hardware Panel through the Add Hardware Panels Wizard The wizard has th
16. Owner Lock Name User z Level Video sl Dest 0 P 0003 Router Matrix Matrix 2 gt Video Z Level Video Eien enya pert leese Fig 182 Tie Lines Added Wi Source I P 0003 pr Cancel Apply 11 Click on the Apply button Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 180 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com A 17 2 Configure a Safe Source Worked Examples A safe source or park channel on RS422 router is set up in the Generic Editor 1 Select the Tie line controller from the Configuration screen and click on the Generic Editor button 2 Navigate to the Safe Source parameter as indicated in Fig 183 Sa Generic Configuration Editor TieLineController 4 Controller 127 0 0 3 2007 Generallnfo Version d J Devices F 1 1 8 3 1 2 Fig 183 Safe Source Ge Configurationitems Gei LoggingSettings 4 Devices 1 TielinesDevice Generallnfo As RouterArray Aa TielineArray a da TielineTallyArray a Gei TielineTallyArray 1 4 43 TielineLevels a Gei TielineLevels 1 RouterArrayindex a Gei TielineTallyArray 2 4 da TielineLevels a Gei TielineLevels 1 5 Router rrayindex 2 RouterArrayindex 1 Aa TielineDests SafeSource 73 Aa TielineDests Go SafeSource 73 set 3 Click on the Safe Source parameter and enter a port value in box at the bo
17. The RollCall templates must be updated if the controller software is updated Both are included in the Workbench installer Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 204 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 4 RollCall Gateway To configure a RollCall Gateway kb 2 Navigate to the configuration screen and add a RollCall controller Ensure that connection to the controller has been established by checking the connection state icon When connection has been established Workbench automatically initiates discovery of the RollCall network Note that it may take several minutes to complete discovery of a network the first time round Information about the network is cached in order to speed up future discovery attempts Open the online generic editor and expand the Frames Detected branch The branch may be populated with a set of one or more subnets each of which may be populated with a set of one or more racks Close the online editor and pull the controller s configuration Open the offline generic editor The Frames Detected branch should contain a snapshot of the live network Right click on the Frames Detected node and select Copy Right click on the Frames node and select Paste A copy of the detected branch should appear underneath the Frames node Page 205 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Routers Reference Appendix C Routers Reference Issue 1 Rev 4 C 1
18. The logical start position the port numbers within a level The logical end position the port numbers within a level The destination offset applied to the level so that it maps to the physical router The source offset applied to the level so that it maps to the physical router Maps the matrix number in the controller to the matrix number in the controlled router device Maps the level number in the controller to the level number in the controlled router device The destination offset to the monitor row in the controlled router The monitor rows allow the user to view an output or input on a one or more special monitoring outputs Some routers have none some have one and some have more than one For example Sirius800 Cygnus have four Sirius 600 has one Pyxis has none This is the offset to the source in the protocol for the first monitored input In the protocol outputs come first followed by inputs The inputs normally start at a fixed offset but for different router controllers this offset is different For example for Cygnus the offset is 576 Used in conjunction with the Audio modify commands where all the levels are stacked on top of each defines the start of that levels first source This is used in the General Switcher Protocol which has no concept of matrix and level just sources and destinations so matrix levels are addressed using ranges of source and destination numbers This is not limited to General Switcher
19. Track Short Name 1 Background Part 1 Left Background Part 1 Right Create Clone Delete Fig 70 Mapped Rrograms To add a new Mapped Program 1 Click on the Create button or the Clone button if defining a Mapped program that is similar to an existing one 2 Type aname for the Mapped Program 3 Select a standard from the drop down list See Table 21 This defines the number of channels available in the mapped program Standard Channels Description Mono 1 Single audio channel Stereo 2 Stereo pair PCM51 6 PCM 5 1 encoded PCM71 8 PCM 7 1 encoded User 1 32 User defined channels Table 21 Audio Standards 4 Add a relevant description if required 5 Enter short names for each channel 6 Determine a priority for each channel if required Setting priorities is useful when routing from a larger source to a smaller destination group ensuring that the correct channels are routed Page 76 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration When seiting priorities ensure that each channel is given a unique priority number otherwise the error icon gg displays and the channels will not map correctly A red outline displays around any errors to help determine where the fault is 7 Determine an order for each channel if required Setting a channel order is useful for shuffling channels when routed The Enable Track Ordering checkbox must be checked before order
20. pom J 100 eg Zoom 5 100 S Halte sl SS ES FIT positions and sizes the whole screen to display within the design window Placement Lock Locks the contents of the screen so that panels buttons etc cannot be moved ltems can still be selected for editing as normal 3 Brush Displays the Brush Repository see section 6 13 Run Screen When not in edit mode test the current screen by clicking the Run Screen button Note This works differently to the Run button in the main menu as it ignores any screen link buttons Design Mode Select Basic or Advanced mode from the drop down list Advanced mode displays extra tools in the Tool Box and additional properties in the Property Window Design Mode Table 29 Toolbar Buttons Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 107 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 3 6 4 Menu www snellgroup com Design Mode When in edit mode a right clicking the main design area of the displays an editing menu Delete Cut Copy Paste Paste Special Key Sequences Maximise Panel Auto Edit Add Tab Page Remove Tab Page Create Template Send to Back Send Backwards Bring to Front Bring Forwards Properties Screen Properties Group Properties Screens Deletes the current selection Cuts the current selection Copies the current selection Pastes the last item cut or copied into the current location Paste all widgets into the current Group
21. 0 cette eee 224 D 2 13 Panel Swap Mode 224 D 2 14 Override Salvo ProtectS 0 0 00 ccc eens 225 D 2 15 Mask with Destination 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 225 D 2 16 Display Audio Parameter 225 D 2 17 Configure Audio Parameters 0 0 0 ccc eee ees 226 D 2 18 Override RBS enge Ee E EE ada 226 DAS Faner LOCK od oh dered Bec dw ecg die eed aoa Mich Beat ab ep dees ween 226 D 2 20 Making selections 0 000 cee eee 227 D 2 21 Panels with Displays 2 0 00 ee eee 227 D 3 Audio Modify Video Reference Operations 0 0 00 0c ees 228 D 3 1 Common RUIS oscila adel pre BOR ca 228 D 3 2 Rules for 6276 X Y Panels not designated master 229 D 3 3 Rules for 6277 Multi output Panels 0 0 0 0 eee 230 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 7 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Appendix E Control Behaviors 231 El Panel DENAVIONS 2 204 020 ateuseue dst cage Med CS hee ew edad oo wed end etan da 231 E 2 Design CONOS 222442505 ris arenas eses bos er E 231 B27 Tab CONTO e pese a bien aii Pan bea eens ase 231 E22 Tiled BOX EE 231 O 45404 oon eon ce eek eee ee whe eek eee ke eee ea dee ee 231 E24 A Ee siria Khe REE EE MRD oa Gees aa 234 E2 S COMDO BOX 25 64 ng oceans Ae Reh ECKE SE ER 235 EO Edi 01010 y 6s 426 266 esos be eerenceaoue esos eee eieas Gane eens 235 Biel ee EEN 235 SH Bi EE 236 HA Ao 236 SE I0 di BOK EE 237 BZ LADS oa part eek kee oben ee ean cede a hae hem
22. Change datar nonpnsaeng reial Sonesen reen 7 d Enable mahi chck screen Voga Routing Screen 2 Auto login name mest maich Weken kirgan Ninaqabes dened ity bo ren mode Buzlomgin Ain ld creer ready foe echbee Pos breryune Admimistrators Fig 36 Users Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 36 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Administration 4 2 1 Add a New User To add a new user 1 From the Home screen or menu click Administration 2 Ifitis not already displayed click the Users tab 3 Click Add new user A new user icon is added to the list of users 4 Inthe User Name field type a user name the user name is not case sensitive Set a new password 1 Click the Change button A Change Password dialog box displays In the Password field type a password and then type it again in the Confirm field The passwords typed in the two fields must be identical Passwords are case sensitive Blank passwords are allowed but are not recommended Click OK 2 If required select an Avatar This is an image that represents the user Click the Choose image bution and browse to the image 3 Select an Initial screen When the user logs on to Workbench and selects Run this is the screen that displays See Screens Editor on page 110 A second screen may be setup such that it runs on a right click of the mouse in run mode lf required check the Enable right click screen checkbox and select a scr
23. Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Add image to library Opacity Fig 117 Image Editor To add an image 1 Click Add new brush This creates an empty default brush 2 To add a new image to the library click Add image to library This displays an Add image dialog box 3 Navigate to the image and click OK 4 Select the empty default brush or one to overwrite and click on the new image 6 13 6 Rename a Brush To rename a brush select the brush and type the new name in the Brush Name field Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 127 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 7 Rules Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Rules 7 1 Description Rules are a custom logical system that can help to automate tasks in Workbench Rules take into consideration all the criteria that are set in the rules editor and return a single boolean output of TRUE or FALSE One or more Actions can be set to occur as soon as the conditions for the Rule are fulfilled To open Rules log in as a user with Rules permissions see section 4 3 It is available from the Windows Start Menu Rearrange the Rules Editor Property Editor and Actions in the Design View so that they are open at the same time see Fig 118 and Mode Windows on page 33 NECE Centra Workbench Peat Gerges ot Rules Editor La Logic Diagram Editor e T E KA Rules E Ki Alarm Rules w Video Gain Too High 9d F Enabled El Enabled
24. nea Select a page i A a Erem SS Script UN Help E Options Destination for restore Select or type the name of a new or existing database for your restore operation To database orkbench X To a point in time Most recent possible el Source for restore Specify the source and location of backup sets to restore From database From device Select the backup sets to restore Restore Name Component Type Server Database Position FirstLSN LastL Connection Server LT DNH MR 03557 SQLEXPRES Connection SNELLWILCOX StuartCheer 33 View connection properties Progress Ready 4 o m e p Fig 201 Select Database to Restore O In the Source for restore section select From device and click the browse button The Specify Backup dialog box displays Fig 202 Select Backup File Specify Backup Specify the backup media and its location for your restore operation Backup media Backup location 6 La 10 11 Click Add Locate the backup file select it and click OK Click OK Check the checkbox to Select the backup sets to restore Select the Options page from the top left of the screen Select Overwrite the existing database and Leave the database ready to use RESTORE WITH RECOVERY Page 242 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Databases Select or type the name of a new or existing database for your restore operation To database
25. 176 4k and 192k If both ControlAudioRefForControl and ControlVideoRefForControl are set to True then the ControlAudioRefForControl takes precedence A 12 Logging Configuration 1 Open Configuration Mode Logging is configured through the Generic Editor Sa Generic Configuration Editor Test 2462 Controller 4 E Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 l Gei Generallnto ie Configurationitems 4 Ge LoggingSettings Gei Generallnfo Ge Enabled True Gei Output Console ioe Level 0 5 Address 172 31 8 63 Gi Port 5656 Gei Version Aa Devices 5 DualProcessorContral Ge Timecode Gei References Fig 170 Logging Configuration 2 Select a controller and click Edit Controller Config Page 171 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples 3 Select the Generic tab and click Edit Controller The Generic Configuration Editor displays 4 Expand the controller branch 5 Depending on the controller used expand either the LoggingSettings branch or the Configurationltems gt Logging branch and set the following parameters Enabled True to enable logging output e Output UDP or Console UDP logging is recommended On a Centra Controller enabling Console sends all log information to the monitor via VGA on 2330 or HDMI on 246x controllers The 2450 controller does not have a VGA output so selecting Console sends log messages to serial port COM1 This can be mo
26. 3 If using a mirrored server enter Failover Partner backup server details These details may be added later See Add a Mirrored Server on page 25 Click OK From the Install Helper click the Refresh button The Workbench Database displays green installed correctly 2 4 9 Add a Mirrored Server When using a mirrored server all changes to the main Workbench configuration database are copied to the backup database on the mirrored server In the event of the main database being unavailable through network failure for example the backup database on the mirrored server automatically becomes available To add a mirrored server to an existing setup 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 Start the Configuration Helper The Configuration Helper is also available from the Windows Start Menu Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Configuration Helper Expand the Workbench Database section Click Click here to alter database connection settings The Connection String Editor dialog box displays Enter the mirrored server details in the Failover Partner field Click OK Page 25 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Installation 2 4 10 Create a New Database Using SQLDBTool The SQLDBTool simplifies the management of databases It allows for the creation of new blank databases and the backup and restoring of existing databases The SQLDBTool is available from the Windows Start Menu Start Al
27. 6276 00 All sources to all destinations 8 level buttons 6276 01 All sources to 1 or 2 destinations with alt dest button 6277 20 All sources to 2 or 4 destinations with alt dest button 8 level buttons 6277 40 All sources to 4 or 8 destinations with alt dest button 8 level buttons 6277 60 All sources to 6 or 12 destinations with alt dest button 8 level buttons 6277 80 All sources to 8 or 16 destinations with alt dest button 8 level buttons 6026776 As panel 6276 00 6026777 As panel 6277 60 or 6277 80 6026778 As panel 6277 20 or 6277 40 Table 57 Supported 2U Panel Types 8 level buttons D 2 Panel Features This section describes features encountered across the range of hardware panel types Where features relate to panel types 6276 and 6277 the features are also applicable to panels that mimic these panel types D 2 1 Special Functions 6276 and 6277 type panels have special functions displayed to the left of the source dest keypad These buttons can each be assigned a different function see Fig 199 See individual panel features for special functions supported Protect Source Destination Keypad DESTINATION GE Seel O Q Q we DEE PRESET STATUS Lewel 2 Level Line Up Previous Next Fig 199 6276 Panel Special Functions D 2 2 Protect Any control panel with a Protect button may lock any destination it has access to which then prevents any device using the same control syste
28. 9 5 9 2 Important 5 5 9 3 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Inhibits Route Inhibits prevent signals from being routed from an input to a specific output For example to prevent a signal from being routed back to itself This is common if the same large router is in use for playback of different channel content such as sport and children s channels The inhibits cannot be changed from any hardware or soft panels e Click Inhibits The Inhibits Editor window displays The Inhibit Editor makes it possible to set or remove route inhibits for each level of the currently selected matrix see Fig 60 a Inhibits Editor MiLev1 Pins Source L151 Destination L1D43 II Inhibit Functions Inhibit Clear Cancel Fig 60 Inhibits Editor e To set clear an inhibit select a point or click and drag to select a group of points and click the Inhibit or Clear button e Press the space bar to repeat the previous action either inhibit or clear on the next selected point or group of points The maximum size of the Inhibits Editor is 2048 x 2048 References This section relates to video references for switch points For Audio Reference configuration see section A 11 The Switch Point Editor specifies which reference type the signal can switch from and whether the switch occurs on field or frame Freeway routers have both 525 and 625 reference inputs Sirius 6
29. CentraSVR CentraSVR KLAController_ RoliCall Tielines UMD Engine 1 amp R Sim Fig 39 Controller Permissions Permission has three levels e Read The basic level of access allowing read only permission It is required for visibility in Run mode e Push Allows the user to push a configuration to the controller e Pull Allows the user to pull the configuration from the controller To allocate a permission check the appropriate box 4 6 Locking Any screen or controller that is being edited is locked automatically The Locking tab shows a list of users that currently have screens or controllers locked for editing including users that have logged out of Workbench without saving a screen that was being edited If a screen or controller has been inadvertently locked select the item and click the Unlock Selected button Click Refresh list to update the list of users that have locked screens or controllers Since this list is not automatically updated it should be done before doing anything else Unlocking a screen or controller does not give a warning to the user that has the lock Ensure that the screen or controller is not currently being edited or any changes may be overridden Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 41 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Administration 4 7 Data Management The Data Management tab is used for backing up and restoring Workbench screens and for repairing the databas
30. Level 2 Start Dest 1 End Dest 16 Dest Offset 16 Destination 32 gt To create the Matrix Ports for this example 1 2 3 A 5 6 7 Select Matrix 1 Select Level 1 and add a Matrix Port Select the port in the Matrix Ports list Set the Start Dest to 1 and set the End Dest to 16 From the Port drop down list select COM1 Click Apply Select Level 2 and add a Matrix Port Select the port in the Matrix Ports list Set the Start Dest to 1 set the End Dest to 16 and set the Dest Offset to 16 From the Port drop down list select COM1 Click Apply Example 2 One Matrix With One level Mapped To Two Routers For a single matrix with one level that must map to two routers split the destinations so that destinations 1 to 16 go to Router X and destinations 17 to 32 go to Router Y see Fig 56 Fig 56 Matrix Ports Example 2 Level 1 Destination 1 Start Dest 1 End Dest 16 Dest Offset 0 Destination 16 Router Controller Destination 1 Level 1 Start Dest 17 End Dest 32 Dest Offset 0 Destination 16 To create the Matrix Ports for this example 1 2 3 A O 6 7 Select Matrix 1 Select Level 1 and add a Matrix Port Select the port in the Matrix Ports list Set the Start Dest to 1 and set the End Dest to 16 From the Port drop down list select COM1 Click Apply Add a second Matrix Port Select the port in the Matrix Ports list set the Start Dest to 17 and set the E
31. MADI If channels from the audio crosspoint are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on all channels to match the first active channel in the MADI stream SRC straight through mode If an AES pair doesn t have sample rate conversion enabled and doesn t have a reference selected then that pair will be output at the same sample rate as the left channel of each pair In the case of a MADI stream all of the pairs will be output at the same sample rate as the first active channel of the MADI stream For example this method can be used to pass Varispeed MADI The maximum sample rate that can be input to the SRC in straight through mode is 50 kHz AES If channels within a pair are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on the right channel to match the left channel MADI If channels from the audio crosspoint are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on all channels to match the first active channel in the MADI stream Page 166 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 10 2 Frame Sync Synchronize or delay video on input or output to a specified reference at a particular standard A separate valid license is required and must be installed for Frame Sync The Frame Sync screen indicates the standard detected on the current signal Setup as many frame synchronizations or delays as required selecting the relevant tabs On the input frame
32. Master Push Configuration Rules Run mode Soft panel design System Architecture Action Provides access to the administration functions Advanced Design provides access to additional properties in the design section For example visibility of button code information when working with hardware panels Note The Advanced buttons on the design toolbar are not related to this permission That is if a role has the Soft Panel Design permission but does not have the Advanced Design permission the Advanced buitons are still available Permits viewing and editing of the controller Configuration section The Master permission is intended to allow the user to perform operations that override other user s actions It is currently only used for routing panels specifically destination protect functionality A user with Master permission can take over protection of a destination protected by another user Allows configuration settings to be pushed to a controller Pushing a configuration to a controller can have serious consequences if not done correctly so this permission should be limited to a small number of users Permits access to the Rules section Permits access to the Run mode Permits access to the Soft Panel design sufficient for most designers Permits access to the System Architecture section Table 7 Permissions 4 3 3 Membership Once roles and their associated permissions are defined assign individual
33. Prompt Message Routed Monitoring Point Tally Selected Destination X Selected Layout Selected Source X Selection Tally XX X Source Main Signal Delay X Source Main Signal Frame Sync Source Main Signal Line Sync Source Main Signal Name X Source Main Signal Pin X Target Block Text Display Text Tally X Track Preset Tally lt x XxX X Track Tally Table 65 Label Behaviors Page 238 v a E CIS L gt gt DS SS Oo oO o APS NS re CO O o oY gf oe fal aay a DOS CO oO o 8888 CO o o TA e E x Mimic ti Matrix Multi Bus ti Matrix BPX ti Matrix XY ti Bus Mu Mu Mu Mu ti Viewer Device Mu Control Behaviors gt o Se 51 358 D o Sc gt Q DAA SAR Ss ax dE S zl kel GIS 9 e 22372330 o D OOOO o Oia ccc Ort X X X X X X X A A X X X KX K KX KX K X XK XK X X A KX K X X K X X K KX KX K X KX K A X A X X X X A X XX 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Control Behaviors Behavior op o o Ye 5 X_ A SE AE o Or Msi co MK D 2 gt gt on H zo zm x 22 TXIK ag 5 Q Q BA cd 2 5 El El S m lt xQue 3 Sis 820 B8aa00 lt 885 Xuu gt 50 5 2220 2222 le 7882 Caax Oe AOQOoOLy 2 2 09909 0S gt 5 00 E 2 9 9 9 9 9 0 42 8 S S 2 eSlalsieaigifi2egee d Ol o oo gt El Se She S 12 wo 2 gt 3 3 S S amp S Di 5 Si 5 50000000 TODO Cig cei qa oO LTLTLTDTsa SSS 2S alialcicc
34. Pyxis Frame 7 Level 7 XPT 1 ContA 6 XPT 2 ContB 6 XPT 3 PSU 1 6 XPT 4 PSU2 6 Pyxis Frame 8 Level 8 XPT 1 ConA 7 XPT 2 ContB 7 XPT 3 PSU 1 7 XPT 4 PSU2 7 Table 50 Pyxis Module Address Locations Offset www snellgroup com oO 2 38 2 O W O 0 50 1 51 2 52 53 0 60 1 61 2 62 3 63 0 70 1 71 2 72 13 0 80 1 81 2 82 3 83 Page 211 Number Routers Reference Input Port Number range Output Port Number range Notes Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 4 2209 2 52 2209 2 52 Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 5 2 53 3296 2 53 3296 Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 6 3297 3840 3297 3840 Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 7 3841 4384 3841 4384 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Routers Reference C 2 Sirius 800 Routers C 2 1 Sirius 850 Module Locations For each router it is important that the correct module addresses are set in the Workbench controller configuration If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set Any modules that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule Expansion O P Modules x24 4 Crosspoint Modules x5 Multiviewer O P Modules X2 Multiviewer Crosspoint Modules x1 or Inpu
35. Tag Name Editing Description For configuring XY hardware panels Using the template in the screen Editor is recommended For configuring 6276 hardware panels Using the template in the screen Editor is recommended Allows for mimic diagrams to work requires system architecture configuration see section 6 7 7 Allows selection of source then destination routing to single router normal configuration is to set a destination and then source Allows for selection of routes across tie lines Allows selection of source then destination across tie lines Allows for destination then source selection across tie lines Screen recalls and pushing Used for text labels and other graphics when no other action is required Required for VTR server control play list display Allows selection of routes as a grid for single button per crosspoint to single router Allows for keypad dial up for routing functions source and destination keypads Allows for destination then source selection on a single router For use with reverse mimic chain Not for general use Allows run mode editing of names without altering the configuration Table 31 Group Behaviors The Group properties determine the behavior of the controls within the group Add controls from the Toolbox to the Group see Toolbox on page 115 For details of the behaviors that can be allocated to each design control see Appendix E Toolbox The toolbox has gr
36. Tracks Crosspoint Source Tracks X DCCP behavior X X X xX Device Chain End Device X Device Chain End Device Input Device Chain Start Device xX Device Chain Start Device Output Table 63 List Box Behaviors Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 236 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 E 2 10 Behavior www snellgroup com S E OQ ag lt lt Forward Tally X Passive default XlX Property Selection Router Destination Names X Router Destination Out Pins X Router Source In Pins X Router Source Mames X Screen Xx Screen List x Selected Clip Selected Layout Selected Playout Device Snapshot List X Video Destination Delays X Video Destination Gains X Video Destination Origin gt Types Video Destination Shuffle X Video Source Delays X Video Source Gains X Video Source Origin Types X Video Source Shuffle X Table 63 List Box Behaviors Edit Box Behavior Audio Path x Audio Processing Alarm Base OID Value Cue To DCCP behavior Duration Page Index Passive default Xx xX Property List Editor Selected Clip Table 64 Edit Box Behaviors Q 2 O o Ben he D o X dai Es gt Q Sg JS Sl o o QA GE Ce Q OQO Q Jeje gt gt si XX st A X X X X A X X K XK A Audio Router XY Group Audio Router XY Track Device Chain x lt Page 237 Device Chain Control Behaviors Kal gt do IN E S g osx Se H 9 5 25500 x 2 5 gt o OES elses EE 2 25 Saa x x x
37. VTR gt 2 gt 1 contains VTR 2 and VTR 21 In this example the Sequence Keys field of the Key Sequences Editor displays the keys VTR 2 and 1 Selecting a key displays the association for that part of the sequence in the Assignments field of the Key Sequences Editor For example selecting the key 2 displays the association for VTR 2 Selecting the key 1 displays the association for VTR 21 Manual Key Sequences To set a manual key sequence 1 2 In the Dial Up Sequence section of the Key Sequence Editor click Start Click the buttons on the panel in the desired sequence Each button press displays in the Dial Up Sequence box To finish entering the key sequence click the End button The sequence is added to the list shown in the Sequences box Select the sequence in the Sequences list Select a key press in the Sequence Keys list On the Sources tab select a Matrix followed by an Association The text that displays on the panel with each key press in the sequence displays in the Part Entry field This text is automatically generated using the key names but can be changed if required Repeat this process until all the sequence keys have been assigned Click Store to save the key sequences Save and push the configuration to the controller Page 123 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 12 Auto Edit 6 12 1 Automatically Assign a Dial up Keypad To create a dial up keypad 1 Sele
38. Workbench Appendix E Control Behaviors Issue 1 Rev 4 E 1 E 2 E 2 1 E 2 2 E 2 3 Panel Behaviors A Panel can be set to Hardware Panel behavior or Soft Panel Behavior For Hardware Panels the following Panel Type behaviors are available Behavior Auto Display Tally Dest Delegate Dest Soft Assign Display Source Assoc Name GPI Panel Lock Level Button Operation Log Takes Mask Levels With Dest Master Panel Override Salvo Protects Swap Mode Use Salvos Use Tielines www snellgroup com x BPXPanel x XY BPXPanel x XY6276Panel MultiBusPanel lt x A X XxX X X lt x X X X X X KM XxX Xx XxX Xx MonitorBusPanel Control Behaviors For Soft Panels Design controls such as buttons sliders and so on must first be allocated to a group so that relevant control behaviors can be attributed to them The Group that a design control is allocated to defines which behaviors are available and can be applied to that control Design Controls Tab Control A Tab Control has a passive behavior for all Groups Titled Box A Titled Box has a passive behavior for all Groups Button Behavior 3 Es Add Alarm x Table 60 Button Behaviors Audio Path o 3 O o o OIE gt a gp lt XK N 2 SS 55 Olo o o 00 O O O o o o ie XI si st Page 231 x Device Chain Generic Generic Dial Up Hardware Panel BPX Hardware Panel MultiBus Hardware Panel XY Hardware
39. p followed by the matching Workbench password fullscreen or f Run in full screen mode To create a shortcut 1 From Windows browse to the Workbench installation folder Workbench LiveRunner exe 2 Create a shortcut to LiveRunner exe 3 Right click on the shortcut and select Properties 4 Atthe end of the Target after the LiveRunner exe type the required command line parameters 5 Click OK 6 Double click the shortcut to open the screen Example Shortcut C Program Files x86 Snell Workbench LiveRunner exe database server localhost SQLExpress uid WorkbenchUser pwd probel database Centra demo Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 30 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 8 Pbak DeployTool 2 8 1 Description The Pbak Deploy tool is used to transfer configuration files to the removable drive on the 2330 and 2450 controller cards Because other Snell products use the Pbak Deploy tool the Dat and On Time tools are not relevant to Workbench Important Whenever Workbench is upgraded transfer the new configuration file to the controller To open Pbak Deploy Tool from the Windows Start menu browse to Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Pbak Deploy Tool P gt Pbak Deployment tool File Target 9 NOT REMOVEABLE Executable files ATB Configuration files DAT L Proqram Files ob sonelh MEA Controllers 4501 Modified Phl2450Controller ATE 20 11 2011 15 46 12 976
40. the first screen in the list is shown Subsequently the design view displays the default screen 2 Atthe bottom right of the window select the Screens Editor tab 3 Either on the Screens Editor tab click the Add button or on the toolbar click the gy button The Add New Screen dialog box displays Type a name for the new screen for example Screen 1 and click OK The new screen is added to the list To open any screen in the list double click on the thumbnail Only one screen can be open ata time A 1 1 2 Modify Screen Properties 1 On the toolbar click the 42 button The Toolbox displays at the bottom of the window 2 Next to the Screens Editor tab select the Property Window tab Alternatively right click anywhere outside the panel and select Screen Properties 3 Change the size of the screen to 390 x 560 all dimensions are in pixels Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 143 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 1 1 3 Modify Panel Properties 1 Click anywhere on the panel and from the property window set the Sizing to 330 x 500 and the Position to left 30 top 30 The panel can be positioned anywhere on the screen by clicking and dragging the panel 2 Click the button at the top right of the panel This creates a new Group tab called Group 1 3 Click the Group 1 tab and then the button The Group properties display in the property window Double click on a panel to lock it in pl
41. to copy the current configuration to the new controller Swap Controllers This swaps the Primary controller with the Secondary controller After swapping the controllers push the configuration to the new Primary controller Swapping controllers loses the behavior for any hardware or software panels that references the Primary controller Reconfigure the panels to reference the new Primary controller Auto Changeover Controllers can also be set to switch operation from the Active controller to the Standby controller in the event of a network failure The changeover occurs only if the Standby controller has a working network connection For 2450 controllers this feature is set using the Generic Editor See Generic Editor on page 94 mb Expand the Controller node Expand the Config2450 node Expand the Features node P pP Edit the AutoChangeOverlfNoNetwork giving a time in seconds for which the network has failed before performing the changeover to the Standby controller A time of 1 disables this feature For 246x controllers this feature is set using the Online Editor See Online Editor on page 95 1 Expand the Controller node 2 Expand the Configurationltems node 3 Expand the MiscellaneousFeatures node 4 Edit the AutoChangeOverlfNoNetwork giving a time in seconds for which the network has failed before performing the changeover to the Standby controller A time of 1 disables this f
42. 1 and Fig 2 show two typical installation scenarios e A distributed installation where the database and SQL server are installed on the server PC with client PCs that have individual components that connect through the network to the database e A stand alone installation where everything resides on a single PC Server ie SQL Database Server Network PC1 Workbench Management 7 Studio Fig 1 Installation on a Network PC3 LiveRunner Client Page 9 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Introduction RE ee eee ee ee IR IER IR IER IR eee Standalone PC SQL Server Management Studio Database Workbench Fig 2 Installation on a Single PC Lan mn gn vn mn mmm pm pm pm mmm ee pm 1 3 Architecture The physical inputs and outputs of the system can be from numerous individual pieces of hardware A controller maps the physical inputs and outputs of the router to the software inputs Sources and outputs destinations A router is a collection of inputs Sources and outputs destinations and crosspoints that can be on one or more cards see Fig 3 Each router box has an internal control card for the router to be controlled by a combination of serial or IP interfaces Router Crosspoint Inputs Sources Outputs Destinations Fig 3 Router Diagram A level is a logical grouping of inputs and outputs which may or may not have a d
43. 1 Output E Add Add Multiple Delete Selected OK Cancel Fig 126 Device Types Editor 3 Ifthe device is a Router check the Is Router Device checkbox 4 A pin description is a either an input or output For each Pin click the Add button e Type a pin Name e Select a Pin Type from the drop down list e Type the Signal Path This is the number of the pin that the pin is connected to Use the buttons near the bottom of the editor to rearrange the order of the pins 5 Click OK The new device type is added to the list of devices see Fig 127 E Ki DeviceTypes ES Vitek 6406 eer D Fig 127 Device Types List 8 4 1 Import Export Device Types Device types files all have the devtype file extension To import a Device Type 1 Right click anywhere in the Device Types window and select Import 2 Browse to the location and select the appropriate devtype file 3 Click Open To export a Device Type 1 Right click on the Device Type to be exported and select Export 2 By default the filename is the same as the device name with the devtype file extension Browse to the location to save the file and click Save Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 138 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com System Architecture 8 5 Devices Devices and cables exist independently of drawings Adding a device to a drawing does not create a new device it simply copies that particular device fr
44. 2450 Controller LEDs Au mE er O DOI O O D6 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 Table 47 Lists the Nucleus Controller LEDs Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 192 2013 Snell Limited Workbench LED D4 D5 D6 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference Description Active Standby e Blue Active e Purple Blue Red Standby 100 Mb Ethernet e Green 100 Mb Ethernet e Off 10 Mb Ethernet No activity Ethernet Link e Flashes Ethernet activity Crosspoint Switch e Flashes Blue Crosspoint switched Not used Not used Not used Communications to other processor e Green Communications to other processor e Off No communications to other processor LTC e Flashes Blue 625 TC present e Green 525 TC present e Off TC not present An FPGA interface validation error occurs if the software detects a difference between the modules configured in the database and the configuration last written to the modules in the frame This can happen when a reconfigure is done to recognise new cards and the Nucleus Controller is rebooted When the Nucleus Controller powers up if it detects a difference between what was configured last and the current configuration it applies the new configuration and the D15 LED shows an FPGA validation error see Fig 191 The next time the Nucleus Controller is rebooted there is no mismatch and therefore the D15 LED is off If th
45. 3 www snellgroup com Routers Reference Sample Controllers Each controller has a standard set of control panels supplied in the sample database Pyxis AES 144x144 Ref1 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 144x144 AES actual router size is dependent on cards and rear connectors fitted to Pyxis frame All MADI Inputs and Outputs have been hidden mapped out in the Logical to Physical port mapping tables so that controller is purely the AES inputs and outputs only Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs Pyxis AA 144x144 Stereo Ref1 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 144x144 Stereo actual router size is dependent on cards and rear connectors fitted to Pyxis frame All MADI Inputs and Outputs have been hidden mapped out in the Logical to Physical port mapping tables so that controller is purely the Stereo inputs and outputs only Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora co
46. 5 Composite Control A combination of slider up down and reset buttons and an edit iw box in one control Slider Control A slider can set a DCCP value within a specified range ei Up Down Control Used to increment decrement numeric property values Fig 101 Numeric Panel Controls Advanced M AAA e e e CO gi miei 4 elo Hyperion e Se Radio Source Web Dal Jog Shuttl List Butt Media Pl Thumbnail Gees i abr Buttons Queue Browser rate i Lu e i Ted e Advanced Hyperion Thumbnail Connects to a Hyperion playing native Hyperion format video source Jog Shuttle This is a control that allows configuration of a jog shuttle pro button but is not visible in run mode Performs video server control in the same way as a normal button but via the external USB Shuttle Pro device List Buttons Automatically displays all the possible options in a group of buttons For example all options for aspect ratio settings 3 O O Lil Radio Buttons Sets a DCCP field to the value of the selected radio button gt Source Queue Used in mimic systems to queue sources Fig 102 Advanced Panel Controls Page 117 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode O Media Player Link to a video streaming service Web Browser This control shows a selected web page Fig 102 Advanced Panel Controls 6 7 5 Meters and Charts ie G Bar Meter Line
47. 5 SP1 Y Y NET Framework 4 NET Framework A Y Y Visual C 2010 Visual C Redistributable Y Y Windows Powershell Microsoft s task automation framework that integrates with the NET Y Y Framework SQLDBTool Used to backup restore create Databases Can be used in place of the SQL Management Studio Core Files Core Installation files Y Y Workbench Design and configuration files Y Live Runner Live control and monitoring Y Rules Server Rules server application Logging Tools Tools and utilities for viewing and gathering log messages Example Resources Example screen files and database Controllers Windows and embedded controller Pbak Deploy Tool Documentation executable files Used to upgrade software on embedded controllers Manual and Getting Started guide in PDF format Table 1 Installation Components For SQL installation on a server refer to the readme rtf file on the DVD MCM Resources Installers readme rtf for the various dependencies 12 Click Next 13 The Install Location screen displays FJ Snell Centra Setup ol el 52 pa Choose Install Location snell Choose the folder in which to install Snell Centra Setup will install Snell Centra in the following folder To install in a different folder cick Browse and select another folder Click Install to start the installation Destination Folder C Program Files 86 Snell Space required 152 3MB Space available 63 968 Fig 14 Insta
48. A o g SEPSE Q TO osx a g D cizi z ol al ol sla x 2 E gq XX Za SZ Lee 022022 2 o o E TZ o oe o o MO x I EES 5 lt 228 Go oO 0 EECHER oe S S Aeee vs RRR OG AKGE A a E oe O Oo o mg o z SS o o ZSS 2 2 2 003355 e e e e a oe H E E SZ E S 2 S S 3 ol l l E 55 5558S o oa 2 III qa OO e pe e A a ea Level X X X X Line Up X X X X Married Lamp X X x X Married Tally x X D xX Panel Lock xX X X X Passive default X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X xX XX X X X X x X Protect X X X X Protect Lamp xX X X X Protect Tally X X D X Tracks Married X Table 62 Image Behaviors E 2 8 Line Line can be added to interconnect elements or add defining regions The line control is passive only E 2 9 List Box Behavior ti Matrix Multi Bus ti Matrix XY ti Viewer Device Passive default Playout Device ti Matrix BPX Router BPX Mim Mu Mu Mu Mu Mu ti Bus Device Chain Hardware Panel BPX Hardware Panel Multi Bus Hardware Panel XY Hardware Panel XY6276 Router Dial Up Router XY Source Queue Audio Router XY Group Generic Audio Path Audio Processing Audio Router XY Track Generic Dial Up Tag Name Editing Active Alarms x x Alarm Alarm Events x lt Audio Destination Delays Audio Destination Gains X Audio Destination Signal Rate Conversion Audio Destination Swaps X Audio Source Gains X Audio Source Swaps X Crosspoint Destination
49. Any modules that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule Fig 194 shows the Pyxis card locations Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Fig 194 Pyxis Card Locations Controller Slot 1 Controller Slot 2 Sr x lt T D gt Pyxis Frame 1 XPT 1 ContA 0 XPT 2 ConB 0 XPT 3 PSU 1 0 XPT 4 PSU2 0 Pyxis Frame 2 Level 2 XPT 1 ContA 1 XPT 2 ContB 1 XPT 3 PSU 1 1 XPT 4 PSU 2 1 Pyxis Frame 3 Level 3 XPT 1 ContA 2 XPT 2 ContB 2 XPT 3 PSU 1 2 XPT 4 PSU2 2 Pyxis Frame 4 Level4 XPT 1 ContA 3 XPT 2 ContB 3 XPT 3 PSU 1 3 XPT 4 PSU2 3 Pyxis Frame 5 Level 5 Table 50 Offset Configuration Edit Module Number O N O Al Lech oo N O O NO O 1 21 2 22 23 0 30 1 31 32 33 0 40 1 41 42 3 43 Pyxis Module Address Locations Page 210 Notes Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 1 Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 2 Slave 2452 Only Knows about ACTIVE card Address switch set to 3 Input Port Number range Output Port Number range 1 544 1 544 577 1120 577 1120 1121 1664 1121 1664 1665 2208 1665 2208 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 Sr x lt 0 E D gt XPT 1 ContA 4 XPT 2 ContB 4 XPT 3 PSU 1 4 XPT 4 PSU2 4 Pyxis Frame 6 Level 6 XPT 1 ContA 5 XPT 2 ContB 5 XPT 3 PSU 1 5 XPT 4 PSU2 5
50. Architecture 8 System Architecture 8 1 Description The purpose of the System Architecture diagram is to capture information on system setup the devices present their inputs and outputs the cables linking them together and information on the controllers controlling them To open System Architecture log in as a user with Architecture permissions see section 4 3 Y B J z Col Ez Ba Si wf Centra Workbench user Te Bt wee System Architecture Le 9 3 Zoom gt Ned Drawings WEY Drawings ES Drawings Devices Device Types Property Editor a Fig 125 System Architecture 8 2 Toolbar Table 38 lists the toolbar buttons Description Edit Toggle the edit mode of the screen Save Saves the changes to the current drawing New Drawing Adds a new drawing Layout View Add new devices Cabling View Add the cabling between devices Zoom Adjusts the size of the screen Setup tie lines Configure a tie lines controller from the system architecture information Table 38 Toolbar Buttons Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 136 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com System Architecture Button Description Screens Lists the screens available as tabbed windows at the right hand side of the drawing area e Property Editor see section 8 5 2 Y e Device Types see section 8 4 Ned e Drawings see section 8 5 1 e Devices see
51. Confirmation e Click Yes A further dialog box displays indicating the number of crosspoints that have been set Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 103 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Fig 94 Crosspoints Set e Click OK Offline routers are ignored and any routed sources set to zero are not affected Load All e Click Load All to take a brand new snapshot of the live system containing all controllers A confirmation dialog box displays Click Yes Any current selections or crosspoint values made in the Snapshot Editor remain Refresh e Click Refresh to update the current snapshot with the crosspoints from the live system This will overwrite any current edited or loaded crosspoints Offline routers will have their routed sources set to zero Controllers on the live system that are not in the snapshot are not loaded Any current selections made in the Snapshot Editor remain 5 9 8 Delete RollCall Cache To clear the cache of RollCall menu set data the menu screens loaded when adding a new or updated module 1 Click on the Delete RollCall Cache button 2 Aconfirmation screen displays Click OK 5 9 9 Convert a Nucleus 2450 Controller to a 246x Controller When replacing Nucleus 2450 controllers with 246x controllers there is no need to delete the Original controllers and configure new ones e In configuration mode right click on the Nucleus 2450 controller an
52. Controller Type a Name for the controller Set the Port to 2007 or the port number set in step 5 Click OK The new 2330 controller is added to the list of controllers Configure the 2330 controller in the same way as any other controller see section 5 4 2 B 1 2 2330 Controller LEDs Fig 190 2330 Controller LEDs NENE ERE 16543210 Front edge of card Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 187 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference Table 44 Lists the Nucleus Controller LEDs LED 0 N OO OF ff W PD POK RST ACT HD SP AC LK Description ON Controller Active OFF Controller Standby ON Watchdog enabled OFF Watchdog disabled Flashing indicates controller running Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Power OK Card is being reset Reboot follows Indicates the active card of a redundant pair Hard disk activity if fitted Not used Ethernet Activity Flickers on send receive Ethernet Link Status Lights when active Table 44 2330 Controller LEDs B 1 3 Updating 2330 Controller Cards The 2330 Controller can be run as software on a PC All 2330 cards store their configuration information on a standard CompactFlash card The Pbak Deployment tool which is installed along with Workbench is used to write the required configuration information to the boot sector of the CompactFlash card 1 Open Pbak Deploy Tool From the Windows Start
53. Destinations Source Associations Destination Associations Salvos 8 Character Names for S850V Source Associations S850A Name EUT 01 EUT 02 EUT 03 EUT 04 EUT 05 EUT 06 EUT 07 EUT 08 EUT 09 EUT 10 EUT 11 ELIT 19 II DO 3 Oh Mi bh WM be Export Import All 4 Character 8 Character 12 Character 16 Character 32 Character Tag Name OK Cancel Fig 51 Associations Editor Page 55 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration For each matrix tabs on the left select the Source Destinations from the drop down list The tabs at the bottom are used to switch between All 4 character 8 character 12 character 16 character 32 character or numeric names Selecting a different Source or Destination in one character format selects the corresponding source or destination in all other character formats Configurations may be copied to and from Excel database configuration forms the names must match To select a range of cells from the Source Associations and Destination Associations tables select the first cell in the range hold down the Shift Key and then click on the last cell in the range A filter is available in a number of the tabs to quickly find sources and destinations e Enter alphanumeric characters into the search bar for example VTR or Edit 1 and click on the Filter button The display chan
54. EE o 5 5 B 2 malm A k Ol E ss 2 ei 0 o O Ola DUDO OD a e e e e DN Gd 5 55 5 S Sla Sl E e We S gt 3 3 J 9 TEI 33 333 olol o oy ag 20 2p EI SS w l w l S wei a eal aE El S A X XX A X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X xX X X A A xX X A A xX A A X XX A A A X X A X XK X A A A XXX A XXX A XXX A XXX A XXX Xx A X XK X A A X A X A X xX A A A X A X X X A A X X X X X K X X X K X K 4 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Control Behaviors Behavior ti Matrix Multi Bus ti Matrix XY tiViewer Device Passive default Playout Device ti Matrix BPX Router BPX ti Bus Hardware Panel MultiBus Hardware Panel XY Hardware Panel XY6276 Audio Router XY Track Mimic Device Chain Generic Hardware Panel BPX Tag Name Editing Audio Processing x Audio Router XY Group Alarm Audio Path Generic Dial Up Mu Mu Mu Mu Mu Router Dial Up Router XY Source Queue Group Preset Information X Input Monitor Source Selection Insert X x Jog X Level X Xx X X X X X X xX X X Line Up Married Lamp Mon Dest Select Monitor X X lt x XX X lt x XX X Monitor Matrix X Monitor On X Monitor Row X X xX X xX Multi Set X X X Navigate Back X X X X X XX X X X X X X XX X x x x x x x Next X X X X Next Chain X Next Page xX x X X X X X X X Out of Service X Output Monitor Source Selection Page Index Preset Clear Page Index Preset Enter Page Index Pre
55. Express and SQL Server Management Studio must be installed on the server To create a new database 1 4 Start SQL Server Management Studio Confirm the server name and login credentials Right click the databases node in the object explorer and select New Database Type the name of the database in the Database name field the default is Workbench Click OK No further configuration of this database is required The Workbench application configures the remainder of the database settings and builds all of the tables Install Sample Databases The sample databases on the installation DVD are SQL version 2008 R2 and cannot be imported to 2005 To install the Workbench databases upgrade to SQL Server 2008 R2 When a Workbench database is converted to SQL Server 2008 R2 it is not possible to revert back to SQL Server 2005 Therefore if using an existing version of the Workbench database make a full backup before upgrading The sample databases each have several example controllers and hardware panels and are on the installation DVD To install the sample database 1 12 13 Browse to the installation CD ROM and open the Nucleus Default Configurations folder The example databases are in zip folders Right click the required zip file and select Extract All the Extraction Wizard displays Click Next Browse to an appropriate location for the files and click Next A bak file is extracted to the selected loc
56. For example sample rate conversion might be used when audio has been recorded on Mini Disc at 44 1 kHz and it needs to be converted to 48 kHz for broadcast A separate valid license is required and must be installed for Sample Rate Conversion SRC Setup 1 Select the SRC Rate from the drop down list 2 Select the SRC Reference from the drop down list if required The reference can be any of the video references or an AES reference 3 Check the SRC Enable checkbox 4 Check the Use SRC checkbox On AES audio screens check the appropriate Use SRC checkboxes for each of the appropriate stereo audio pairs SRC Operation e AES Sample rate conversion is applied to groups of eight audio pairs rather than individual channels All selected pairs in the group will be synchronous to each other and output at the same selected sample rate Deselected pairs will pass through with their sample rates unchanged e MADI Sample rate conversion is applied to all pairs in the MADI output stream rather than individual channels All pairs in the MADI stream will be synchronous to each other and output at the same selected sample rate Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 165 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples Channels within a pair must be the same initial sample rate and synchronous to each other If they are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on the right channel to match the left channel
57. Goy be erter Sclve mah kocia biah lab bra n brush oia Deg gp ml Ae Set ra SE ss nx Desk Ss an Defekt Defek open Composite rush ap EA ra og Le ch Ke Ver SS Dami ight i Era geck mm prey bruh rro dek Green ar e begat 4 acia in j bra e gd mi tri 7 mimic Denke Faulk r Demek mint Debat mimi emk miri Default m kret break in burro breakin button chain tested chor tested Porro barksrsund b yorgei Barkeri harige Ettan fress Lact farma Fe korzerel ASS adre d Demuk mimik Den mimic Debayle mimi D b Defauk mem Deisi mimi Gefsuk me i un insert button monto button monitor button Gebei rod button bsdeground background bsdeground korang bedorgund Fig 114 Brush Repository Images in Workbench have a name in the repository Changing a brush changes all occurrences of that brush Page 125 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 13 1 Add a Brush To add a brush 1 Click the Le button 2 Rename the Brush 3 From the drop down list select the Brush Type e Linear Gradient e Solid Color e Radial Gradient e Image 6 13 2 Clone a Brush A clone of a brush creates an identical copy of an existing brush The copy can then be edited as required To clone a brush 1 Selecta brush 2 Click he button A copy of the brush is added to the repository named Brush 1 3 Rename the Brush 4 Edit the brush as required 6 13 3 Solid Color S
58. Graph E 2 LA D 5 Bar Meter A bar meter displays the current value of a DCCP property Setup several ht meters alongside each other to provide a bar graph for monitoring purposes for example y Line Graph A line graph displays the value of a DCCP property as it changes over 2 time Round Gauge A speedometer type gauge that displays a DCCP property value O Fig 103 Meters and Charts Controls 6 7 6 Mimic di Mimic Box Device Selector A block of buttons for setting the mimic mode 7 Mimic Box A target block for mimic panels Fig 104 Mimic Controls 6 7 7 Device Chain ES Device Chain Device Selector Device Chain Box A target block for mimic panels Device Selector A block of buttons for setting the mimic mode gt Fig 105 Device Chain Controls Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 118 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 8 Property Window The majority of control configuration is done through the Property Window For example the dimensions of a Screen the behavior of a Group the position of a Panel and all the colors captions and behaviors of all the different controls including buttons labels etc To view or edit the properties of a control 1 On the toolbar click the 4 button The Toolbox displays at the bottom of the window 2 Atthe bottom right of the window select the Property Window tab 3 Select a contr
59. Key Sequence Generation 124 Keypad RUE la E citan 124 L Levels Configuration Editor 62 Router Configuration 0 00nnnea000an 53 Link ln 147 150 Loading a Snapshot oooconcccncncnnncncccccc 103 Reie 35 Logging Configuration neeoe000000aa 171 Logical Destinations cccee 71 80 M Matrices Router Configuration 53 Matrix ale GE 58 Membership cceeecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 39 Menu Architecture cccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeees 137 CGonfouration 46 a 108 Mimic Diagrams cooocccnccnnncnnnnnnnnco 141 173 e 164 Module IR 70 79 Module Locations GV OMS esvisiccidic dio 218 EE 210 A A 212 214 Multi iewer 160 N Networks sns nsnnnnnnnnnsesnrnnesrrrresrrreesrrrersnnne 44 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Nucleus Auto Confgure 71 CGontroller Features 191 Sid EE Force Reset E 71 Logging Configuration 171 Logical Destinations 71 Logical Sources nnnenana0ann 71 Module Is 70 O OID Rewrite Helper Online Editor P Panel DEVICE EN Hardware 112 SO EE Templates occcccoonnnnccconcnnocononnnnos e e E tee 46 Password EE Pbak Deploy Nucleus Update ooccccooonnncnnno Software Tool PC Controller c ccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeens Permissions Gcreeng rrenen 40 Port Config
60. Name IP Address or Port 3 If any rules reference the controller these can be updated 4 Click OK Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 96 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 9 9 2 5 9 2 1 www snellgroup com Configuration Push and Pull Configuration The Push Config to Controller s and Pull Config from Controller s buttons are for uploading and downloading configurations to and from the controller The first time a controller is run it is necessary to push from the database to the controller When connecting to an existing controller pull from the controller ensuring that a known working configuration is used Pushing to the controller can result in lost data Pushing a configuration causes the controller to display the green tick to show the configuration matches However on 2450 controllers the controller does not take action on the new configuration until it is reset To reset the 2450 controller click the button As changes to configuration affects both the controller any connected clients LiveRunner and other controllers connected via DCCP it is recommended that these are closed for the duration of the push and restarted afterwards In a dual controller configuration the following configuration update procedure is recommended 1 Close all connected clients 2 Push the new configuration to the Standby controller and wait for it to restart 3 Force a reset of the Active controller This will initiate a fai
61. Only one screen can be open at a time A 3 2 Modify Screen Properties 1 On the toolbar click the 4 button The Toolbox displays at the bottom of the window 2 Next to the Screens Editor tab select the Property Window tab Alternatively right click anywhere outside the panel and select Screen Properties 3 Change the size of the screen to 390 x 560 all dimensions are in pixels A 3 3 Modify Panel Properties 1 Click anywhere on the panel and from the property window set the Sizing to 330 x 500 and the Position to left 30 top 30 The panel can be positioned anywhere on the screen by clicking and dragging the panel 2 Click the button at the top right of the panel This creates a new Group tab called Group 1 Page 151 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples 3 Click the Group 1 tab and then the button The Group properties display in the property window Double click on a panel to lock it in place the screen color changes A 3 4 Modify Group Behavior 1 From the Behavior drop down list select Alarm Behavior 2 Define a name for the group if required for example Alarms A 3 5 Add an Image Tally 1 From the Toolbox at the bottom of the screen click the Image control Drag the cursor and place the image Tally on the panel 2 Inthe Property Window select the Group defined above from the drop down list 3 Select Image Tally from the Behavior drop down list 4 Click
62. P 0001 1 up 0001 3 2 O P 0002 2 I P 0002 Salvo002 3 O P 0003 3 1 P 0003 O O P 0004 4 I P 0004 Salvo003 5 O P 0005 p Salvo0o4 6 O P 0006 6 I P 0006 7 O P 0007 7 1 P 0007 Salvo005 0 3 Salvonnn Add Entry Dest Assoc Level 1 Level 2 Level 4 Matrix 1 O P 0001 I P 0003 m0150002 Matrix 1 O P 0004 I P 0003 Matrix 1 O P 0006 I P 0003 lt Clear gt m01s0001 Matrix 1 O P 0009 I P 0003 m0150002 Matrix 1 O P 0002 I P 0005 p Remove Selected Entries Import Salvos Export Salvos ok cancel Apply m01s0015 Fig 63 Salvos Editor Page 66 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration If the number of salvos was set in the Router Configuration See Router Configuration on page 53 they are listed in the Salvos Editor Salvos are commonly used to restore to a known state For example to reset an outside broadcast truck to its default settings after returning from a venue To create a salvo 1 Click Add Salvo A new Salvo is added to the Salvos box By default salvos follow a naming convention of Salvo001 Salvo002 Salvo003 and so on Select the required matrix from the drop down list Select a Destination Associations and a Source Associations Click Add Entry The selection displays in the crosspoint list Continue adding sources and destinations in this way until the salvo is complete Click Apply t
63. Panel XY6276 Mimic ti Bus ti Matrix BPX ti Matrix Multi Bus ti Matrix XY tiViewer Device Mu Mu Mu Mu Mu D 50 o S 5 3 3 coses S Lan c gt oO gt s 2m Alx gt 55 ke amp amp O00 e OD 0 OD OF UN w bel KH 032232330 o D o OO oO e D DEI Ok 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 Behavior Alarm Screen Alarm Screen Alias Alarm Set Alt Dest Alt Level Application Assign Alias Audio Modify Base OID Block Select BPX Break In Button Select Layout Call Function Clear Clear Routing Selection Clear Selection Clear Tie line Config Audio Connect Start to End Copy Value Behavior Cue Clip Cue To DCCP Behavior DCCP Wildcard Behavior Delegate Dest Assign Dest Group Dest Ident Dest Match Dest Source Select Dest Track Destination Destination Alias Dial Up Dial Up Enter Display Audio Duration Enqueue www snellgroup com o 2 O o UN E lios oo XK OO EE EE OOO aa KC ye CO OO OO 0 o o Dd oo AM WES a LL LL st OC A A A A X X X KX K A X X A X X A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A X A X Exit Run mode xX x X X X X X Extended Page X X Goto Page X X Table 60 Button Behaviors Page 232 Generic Dial Up X X Control Behaviors 2 do n N va CN a S gt S gt MOS d 3 O ES S Cc o Oo 0 o 2 gt 5 o o 0 G6 a G xos2 3 2535 AAAA x x x 5 S xa S e
64. Previous Chain and Next Chain and set the text and behavior properties as appropriate Add two text labels and set the behaviors to Active Chain and Chain Count These display the number of chains discovered and the index of the currently active chain setup of the mimic diagram is complete A 14 RollCall Screens When a RollCall Gateway controller has been configured a screen can be designed to control and monitor devices on the RollCall network 1 2 3 4 5 Issue 1 Rev 4 Create a screen and add a Generic behavior group to the default panel Assign the RollCall controller as the group s controller setting Add a label to the panel Set the label s behavior to DCCP behavior Set the label s OID property to a property underneath the Frames node of the controller configuration Save the screen and run it to see the results Page 176 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 A 15 GPI Overrides www snellgroup com Worked Examples When a hardware control panel is in one of the BPX modes it includes a joystick override feature that allows the GPI to be used as inputs A 15 1 GPI Ports on a Panel The15 way D type connector on the rear of a hardware control panel provides opto coupled GPI ports Pin 0 NOOO Bb Go DN Function GPIO1 GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO4 GPIO5 GPIO6 GPIO7 GPIO8 are available Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 15 2 Configuring GPI Overrides Function GPIO9 GPIO1
65. Protocol it applies to any protocol that needs it This checkbox when selected allows audio modify commands L R L L R R R L MONO This checkbox when selected enables protects on a slaved router This checkbox when selected allows accumulated crosspoint commands to be actioned in one go Allows a controller to get a complete dump of crosspoint tallies from a router to speed up router interrogation Configures the ports to a default setting according to the number of levels and the matrix sizes Select the port from the drop down list to auto sync names This checkbox option automatically synchronizes the names used by the controller with the names This option only works if the port is configured for GeneralRemoteOut Table 15 Port Editor Matrix Example 1 One Matrix With Two Levels Mapped To One Router For a single local or external matrix with two levels each of which has a start destination of 1 and an end destination of 16 map these signals a single router so that there is an offset of 16 That is the router has 32 destinations see Fig 55 1 Local Cards in the same frame 2 External Serial controlled external level Page 59 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Fig 55 Matrix Ports Example 1 4 Level 1 Destination 1 Start Dest 1 End Dest 16 Dest Offset 0 Destination 16 Router ee ee Controller Destination 17
66. SSSSSSS Q for 8 character e PRESET warning messages are enclosed by e STATUS warning messages are enclosed by lt gt Message Explanation lt No Dst gt No destination association selected lt No Src gt No source selected because no destination assigned for any level in destination association N gt No destination assigned in the selected destination association on the most significant active level but there are destinations on the lower levels lt P gt No destination assigned in the selected destination association on the most significant active level but there are destinations on the upper levels lt gt No destination assigned in the selected destination association on the most significant active level but there are destinations on the upper and lower levels 2No Src Source association with no sources on any level has been selected LOCKED Panel lt TAKE gt button and source buttons are disabled via lock button or remote panel disable PROT Source cannot be routed as destination is protected After a few seconds the panel name is displayed before reverting back to showing the current source routed a few seconds later PROTECT When flashing it indicates that destination is protected on the next take OVRIDE Source cannot be routed as destination has overridden source routed After a few seconds the name of the device responsible for the override is displayed b
67. STATUS displays AUD parameter of the destination for the most significant active level in the system Eighth character in PRESET display normally displays AUD parameter of the pre selected source displayed for the most significant active level in the system It is also used to show the pre selected destination AUD parameter Operation 1 Press lt DISPLAY AUDIO gt to enable audio parameters to display optional Clear PRESET display Press lt CONFIG AUDIO gt and select an AUD parameter An 8 character name is displayed in the PRESET display to indicate destination AUD parameter pre selected Press lt TAKE gt to e Assign AUD parameter to destination e Update eighth character of STATUS display with combined source and destination AUD parameter e Auto cancel config AUD parameters mode and blank PRESET display Operation 2 Press lt DISPLAY AUDIO gt to enable audio parameters to display optional Dial up source in PRESET display Press lt CONFIG AUDIO gt and select an AUD parameter The pre selected AUD parameter is displayed flashing alternately with in the eighth character of the PRESET display Press lt TAKE gt to e Assign AUD parameter to destination e Update eighth character of STATUS display with combined source and destination AUD parameter e Revert to showing source AUD parameter in eighth character of PRESET display e Auto cancel config AUD parameters mode Page 230 2013 Snell Limited
68. Screen Name dialog box displays Type a name for the new screen for example Screen 2 and click OK The new screen is added to the list 2 Double click on the new screen to open it in the editor 3 On the toolbar click the 2 button 4 Delete the Take button and move the destination buttons and tallies up 5 Click the Group 1 tab and then the button The group properties display in the property window 6 On the toolbar click the c button 7 Test the Screen by selecting Run from the main menu Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 146 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples It can take several seconds for the panel to communicate with the controller 8 Click one of the destination buttons the button changes color 9 Select a source and the source button changes to a bright color When switching between destinations the source button changes with the active source A 1 3 Link Panels Together Add buttons to the two panels to allow switching between them A route selected on one panel is also shown on the other panel bea ro vd bea z5 Ei ro rd bea O P 0001 O P 0002 O P 0003 O P 0004 O P 0001 O P 0002 O P 0003 O P 0004 Fig 141 XY Panels with Buttons for Switching Between Screens 1 Open the Panel without a Take Button see section A 1 1 2 Add and resize a new button Set the Behavior to Screen and Behavior Specific to Screen 2 the panel without a take button If ne
69. Slave Fig 198 Cygnus Card Locations Front View Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 218 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 C 3 2 Top Input row XPT 1 XPT 2 Output Row XPT 1 XPT 2 129 141 Bottom Input 2 Row Table 55 13 OO Di 130 N st 14 142 131 LO mM O st www snellgroup com Input 15 Output 143 132 144 Input wz mM Example Module IDs 1 to 24 25 to 128 129 to 152 153 to 256 257 to 258 259 to 269 270 to 271 272 to 280 TDigitalVideolnputModule Ll oD Y 133 wz wz 17 145 CN Di TUnknownModule T Digital VideoOutputModule TUnknownModule TVideoCrosspointModule TUnknownModule T Digital VideoOutputModule TUnknownModule Page 219 134 mM st 18 2 0 271 146 oD MON1 25 25 N A CTRL1 N A CTRL2 135 NO O NO lt none gt SPARE Cygnus Slot Module Address Locations 5 6 MON2 CO N MON3 2 2 42 19 147 30 136 41 20 148 29 40 137 Routers Reference Input ONAN e OA Y ON e ON THN QA Output O OO OO Dr OO ON lt Mm O oi LO Y LO re Tw LTP YY WP TT Y Y Input OO oN 00 ML N ON ON OO A 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference Appendix D Hardware Panels Reference D 1 Supported Hardware Panels D 1 1 1U Panels Panel Mode Description 6705 Split XY 16 sources to 16 desti
70. Status The checksum icons show whether the database in the physical controller matches the database on the SQL server Table 9 lists the Checksum status icons Icon Description Le Configuration Match Both databases are identical Configuration Unknown Unable to calculate configuration checksum on the controller Note RollCall does not calculate a checksum i Configuration Mismatch Configuration on the controller is different to the GER configuration in the database Table 9 Checksum Status 5 2 3 3 Primary Status When using dual controllers the Primary column indicates which of the two controllers is the Primary Controller The Secondary controller of a pair is left blank in this column Important Swapping controllers loses the behavior for any hardware or software panels that references the Primary controller Reconfigure the panels to reference the new Primary controller Single controllers do not require a Primary status and are left blank Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 45 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 5 2 3 4 5 2 3 5 5 2 3 6 9 3 www snellgroup com Configuration Active Status The Active column shows whether the status of the controller is Active Unknown or in Standby When updating the configuration of controller pairs push the new configuration to the controller with Standby status initially this is the Secondary controller test the changes and either revert to
71. This screen displays when a new version of Workbench is installed or the database structure has changed For example if one of the sample databases is installed Important f this dialog box displays but no changes have been made contact the system Issue 1 Rev 4 administrator The system cannot log you on until you update BERASE EN Update Database Fig 24 Update Database To view the differences between the databases click the Le button The Database Analyzer displays indicating the parts of the database that will change when the database updates see Fig 25 Workbench cannot start without updating the database Database Analyzer Probel MCM ModelStore dll a 9 Probel MCM RulesEngine dll t 9 ApplicationAction t Q DecpAction t Q DecpCallFunctionAction t DecpConnectionInput t DecpCopyInputAction t DecpIncrementValueAction t Q DecpInput DecpSetValueAction EqualityOperator GreaterThanOperator t 9 LessThanOperator LookupOperator ValueComparisonOperator O Unchanged Added Removed Changed y Unchan Fig 25 Database Analyzer Example 1 Click Update Database 2 Click OK The login screen displays see Fig 26 Page 28 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation Fig 26 Login Screen 2 6 Log In to Workbench When Workbench is first installed there is only are two users see Table 3 User P
72. X A X XXX A X XX A X XK A Mimic ti Bus Mu lt x XX X X XX X ti Matrix BPX Mu ti Matrix Multi Bus ti Matrix XY Mu tiViewer Device Passive default Playout Device Router BPX Mu Mu A X X A X X Control Behaviors Router Dial Up Tag Name Editing x x XxX Xx XxX Router XY Source Queue x lt X X X X x lt lt x X XxX XxX X X X K X X X KX K A The CheckBox control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial up Groups The CheckBox sets a value in a DCCP field to TRUE or FALSE The DCCP field must be a text field such as a Name UseLastRunViewChanges or StringValue If the DCCP field is set to change a DoubleValue field an error displays at runtime Page 234 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Control Behaviors E 2 5 Combo Box Behavior WA Si oO S ES SE S 2 Oo el EI E n Se x ao 90 a e 2330 a x3 SS a lt X lt J c Sle PARE a a sl 8 Q o Owe E TZ e e oe o mM lt 8 2 5 0 e BS Zog Saa xx x a Sl axan 25 Poco e e e e a a a e aaae aja CiT o e LeS e SS L 2 Ee sss te Dee ZS 232000 S 2 Se 22 oO a Lee 2 2 LEE Sal EI Ol D O S S Spe se eil oi d S 333050 S 5 5 5 OR O VO B B B SSB BE DBL VTDAD VG qitet AA qa oO O LILI Li Liss Ss elei eil ne Active Alarms X DCCP behavior X X X Device Chain End Device X Device Chain End Device S Input Device Chain Start Device X Device C
73. a previous state or update to the Active controller initially this is the Primary controller Information does not pass between controllers To make both controllers match click the Copy config to partner button and then push the configuration to the controllers Partner Config Matches For dual controllers the Partner Config Matches icons indicate whether the databases match for the Primary and Secondary controllers see section 5 9 5 Icon Description Both databases match Y ki There are differences between the databases Table 10 Partner Status Controller Version This column shows the controller version and the date that it was last changed This is useful for determining which database to update if there is a mismatch between dual controllers see section 5 2 3 5 Workbench and the controller version must be compatible Menu The following menu items are available at the right side of the screen Add Controller Add a new controller See Add a New Controller on page 48 Edit Controller Config Edit the configuration of the selected controller See Edit Controller Configuration on page 51 Edit IP Address or Name Edit the IP address and name of the selected controller See Edit Controller IP Address or Name on page 96 Generic Editor Open the Generic Editor See Generic Editor on page 94 Online Editor Open the Online Editor See Online Editor on page 95 Delete Se
74. and click Workbenchinstaller exe 3 Ifthe Install Checker screen displays Administration rights may not have been granted on the PC Es InstallChecker el EN Eg InstallChecker has stopped working Windows is collecting more information about the problem This might take several minutes Cancel Fig 8 Install Checker Screen Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 14 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Installation To run the Configuration Helper open Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Configuration Helper e Right click on Configuration Helper and select Run as administrator ey Windows Update Al XPS Viewer dy Accessories A Games Open Se Run as administrator Troubleshoot compatibility Open file location Restore previous versions a LiveRunner Send to b EN Rules Servi EI Vite Cut Copy Delete Rename n k Properties Configuranorrrerper Devices and Print Ly Controllers Default Programs Help and Support Fig 9 Run as Administrator 4 When using Windows 7 the User Account Control screen displays when starting the installer ae ES AO A e User Account Control J Sg A Program name Workbenchlnstaller exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer M Show details Change when these notifications appear Fig 10 U
75. are comprised by the logical destination in the Phy 1 to Phy 6 fields Continue adding the logical destinations in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click Apply or OK Force Reset of This Card To ensure that changes are made to a card after pushing a database click the Force Reset of This Card also available on the main configuration screen Force Reset of Other Card This is only relevant in a dual controller system It connects to one controller and force a reset on the other controller For example in a dual controller system when the database has been loaded into the controller this resets the other controller so that it becomes active Page 71 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration 5 5 7 Local Router Hardware When configuring a Centra controller there is an additional Local Router Hardware tab The settings on this tab provide additional information that is required by the 246x controller see Fig 65 Fig 65 246x Controller La Controller Configuration cele Devices Routers Local Router Hardware Generic router2007 Basic Configuration Video Configuration Reference GeneralReferenceControl x 9 Auto Configure Auto Configure Video Audio Configuration Configure Audio Mapping Edit Inputs Edit Outputs Edit Module Configurati
76. as required To open any screen in the list double click on the thumbnail Only one screen can open at a time Page 109 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 4 2 Screens Editor The Screens Editor displays the screens available on the system including Soft screens and Hardware screen templates To open the Screens Editor e Click on the Screens Editor tab The Screens Editor window displays Screens sorted by name x EEE E E EEEEEEe Property Window Screens Editor Panel Templates Fig 96 Screens Editor The slider at the bottom of the window resizes the view of the screens in the Screens Editor The screens can be displayed in alphabetical order default or by alias See section 6 4 2 1 selectable from the drop down list at the top of the Screens Editor Right clicking on a screen in the Screens Editor displays the following menu Edit Alias Edit the alias number of the screen see section 6 4 2 1 Clone Screen Make a copy of the screen A prompt for a new name displays Run Screen Runs the screen Screen link buttons are ignored Set as start screen Sets the selected screen as the initial screen for the current user See Users on page 36 Delete Screen Deletes the screen from the Screen Editor To rename a screen Click on the screen title e Edit the title as required After renaming a screen to display the screens i
77. as simply or intricately as desired with relevant controls arranged into Groups each with specific behaviors See Groups on page 114 Panel Templates Any panel can be exported as a template To view existing templates e Select the Panel Templates tab see Fig 97 Panels created using a template are linked to the template so that any changes in properties are reflected through all panels created using that template Panel Templates nx il AAStereo 6276 00 St AAStereo 6276 00 Display Buttons ad Delete selected Export to file Import from file Device Explorer Property Window Screens Editor Panel Templates Fig 97 Panel Templates Page 112 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 6 5 3 1 6 5 3 2 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Design Mode To create a new panel template 1 Open the required panel from the Screens Editor tab 2 Click the 2 button to edit the panel The Toolbox displays at the bottom of the window 3 Right click on the panel and select Create Template The panel is added to the Panel Templates tab with a default name of New Template 4 Click on the Panel Templates tab 5 Click on the new panel template title and rename the panel template Use Panel Templates To use a panel template e Double click on the panel template from the list and click onto the screen Repeat the process to add further panels on the screen Any number of
78. button selected changes to its Preset color Only one preset can be active at a time Page 157 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples Cone USB Pe Fees Ll TAKE Fig 156 XY Panel Monitor Button Example 3 Click the Take button The Preset button changes to Active and the output is visible on the monitor The panel remains in monitor mode until the Monitor button is clicked again When in monitor mode buttons not part of the monitor set for example salvos protect buttons are ignored A 7 3 Monitoring on a Dial up Panel Monitor buttons can also be a added to a panel with the Router Dial Up Behavior When in monitor mode dial up a source or destination the current selected one is applied when clicking the Take button In the following example clicking Take routes destination 2 to monitor 1 Dial Up Panel Il Cen Destination Source Ee Le IT emm 0004 pa Current Source sl I P 0001 Take Clear Fig 157 Dial up Panel Monitor Button Example Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 158 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 8 Destination Follow It is not possible to use the logical to physical mappings to configure destinations to follow other destinations because additional source destinations are ignored However destinations can be set to follow other destinations with the Generic Editor See Generic Editor on p
79. by clicking on the relevant button under All A 10 1 3 Delay To add a delay to a channel 1 Click on the Enabled button 2 Enter a delay value in seconds To set the delay back to zero e Click on the 0 sec button ii To disable the delay e Click again on the Enabled button All channels may be enabled disabled or set to zero seconds by clicking on the relevant button under All Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 163 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 10 1 4 Gain To alter the gain of a channel either e Type again value directly into the numeric box or e Move the slider for coarse control 1 dB increments decrements e Fine tune with the up and down arrow keys 0 1 dB steps Mixer screens only e To return to O dB click the O dB button or Unity button in the Mixer screens Other processing in the Gain screen Mute the source by clicking the Mute button Q e Invert the phase by clicking on the Phase Invert button All channels may be selected deselected for O dB gain Mute Un mute or Phase Invert Normal by clicking on the relevant buttons under All A 10 1 5 Mixing Mix audio channels prior to shuffling For embedded audio there are 16 mixers each of which can mix down up to 16 channels into a single audio channel Fig 164 Mixing Controls 1 Click on a Mixer button at the top of the panel 2 Using the up and down arrow keys at the
80. edits to more than one pin at the same time see Fig 132 Page 140 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com System Architecture Connection HD SDI IP 1 HD SDI IP 2 SYNC DD DR HD SDI OP 2 HD SDI LOOP SYNC OUT REF LOOP Boag Select Disconnect Fig 132 Pin Display 8 6 3 Mimic A Mimic Diagram shows the cabling and routing between device Also explore and manipulate signal paths through a broadcast system see Fig 133 Section A 13 shows a worked example of a simple single matrix architecture with two video servers as inputs and two multiviewers as outputs Fig 133 Mimic Diagram The basic requirements for a Mimic Diagram are e One or more router matrices linked by tie lines if there are more than one e A set of re entrant devices with their inputs and outputs linked into the same matrix e A set of inputs and outputs for the system generally servers incoming lines multiviewers monitors and so on e A router controller e A tie lines controller Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 141 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com System Architecture 8 7 Cables Link devices together with cables 1 To link an input to an output click the Ed button on the toolbar 2 Click on the output pin to be connected A red connection line extends from the pin to the cursor 3 Move the cursor to an input pin where a valid connection can be made the line changes green
81. flashing alternately with in the eighth character of the DESTINATION display Press lt TAKE gt to e Assign AUD parameter to destination e Update eighth character of DESTINATION display to indicate new AUD parameter e Update eighth character of STATUS display with combined source and destination AUD parameter e Auto cancel config AUD parameters mode Operation 2 Press lt DISPLAY AUDIO gt to enable audio parameters to display optional Select DESTINATION display selector LED lit against DESTINATION display Dial up destination for example VT 3 Select PRESET display selector LED lit against PRESET display Dial up a source for example VT 7 Press lt CONFIG AUDIO gt selector LED lit against DESTINATION display followed by an AUD parameter The pre selected AUD parameter is displayed flashing alternately with in the eighth character of the DESTINATION display Press lt TAKEs to e Assign AUD parameter to destination e Update eighth character of DESTINATION display to indicate new AUD parameter e Update eighth character of STATUS display with combined source and destination AUD parameter e Auto cancel config AUD parameters mode Page 229 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference D 3 3 Rules for 6277 Multi output Panels Only Destination AUD parameters can be assigned from this panel type When DEST IDENT activated the eighth character in
82. group is added to the list see Fig 189 Page 185 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples Fig 189 UMD Driver Editor UMD Driver Editor Col kE UMD Group s Serial Communication Details Audio Group 1 i SerialComms 107 2 COM Port COM1 Baud Rate br38400 Data Bits dbs Parity EvenParity Stop Bits OneStopBit UMD Array Item s UMD Address Alignment Brightness Group Name Video Group 1 Comm Type IPComms 107 3 Protocol Undefined Remove selected group Add new group Export to CSV Import from CSV Remove UMD Add UMD ok cancei Apply T 8 10 11 12 13 Type a Group Name Select the Comms Type from the drop down list The options change depending on the selection there is no automatic check for valid COM ports Select the Protocol from the drop down list For each UMD in the group click Add UMD An entry is added to the list Enter the UMD Address Each UMD must have a unique address See the UMD manufacturer s documentation for details Type the Caption Text to display its Alignment and Brightness 0 Minimum 8 Maximum If required select up to four tallies Page 186 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference Appendix B Controllers Reference B 1 2330 Controller A 2330 Control
83. oO oo oO oO oO O Y Y YT TE oO CO e DN DO st ON DN ON ON o oO CO e DN D st TAANA oO CO e DN DO st ON DN ON ON Oo o ON oO e rf rs rs rs N Y YT O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Routers Reference C 2 2 Sirius 840 Module Locations For each router it is important that the correct module addresses are set in the Workbench controller configuration lf the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set Any modules that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule Multiviewer O P Modules x3 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module or Input Monitor Module A BNC Re clocking Input Modules or Fiber Re clocking Input Modules KT Toon ES L IK Control Fan out Modules x2 AK Lys Ve Audio Crosspoint Modules x1 or x2 Video Crosspoint Modules x4 or x5 r i A d MAA ME wee a Nucleus Controllers x2 DAA BNC Re clocking Output Modules or Fiber Re clocking Output Modules O P Monitor Module Fig 196 Sirius 840 Card Locations Front View Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 214 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com C 2 2 1 Sirius 840 Controller Module Addresses MV Output 3 248 MV Output 2 947 MV Output 1 246 MV XPT 245 Input Row oe ot oo D a and Fan ae Controllers e om got oo CU oo N N Audio XPT 233 XPT 1 193 XPT 2 194 X
84. of routing up to 128x128 RS422 Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs C 1 3 Sample Panels The sample panels match the controllers e AAMono 6276 00 The default controller is PyxisAnalogueAudio288x288MonoRef1 e AAStereo 6276 00 The default controller is PyxisAnalogueAudio144x144StereoRef1 e AES 6276 00 The default controller is PyxisAES144x144Ref1 e Video 6276 00 The default controller is PyxisVideo72x72Ref1 All the sample screens have an identical layout see Fig 193 DESTINATION A EE CMEL SELECT oS 5 mma alcala Dest E A Line Up PRESET _______ STATUS Level 5 Levai 6 Level 7 Level 6 3 es i Fig 193 Pyxis Screens 3 a Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 209 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 C 1 4 www snellgroup com Pyxis Module Locations Routers Reference For each router it is important that the correct module addresses are set in the Workbench controller configuration If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set
85. of the physical router controller and the IP address of the controller listed in Workbench Page 44 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 2 3 Controller Status The configuration screen shows the status of each controller Icons show whether the controller is connected and whether the databases in the physical controller and SQL server match When using dual controllers it shows which is the Primary controller and which one of the two controllers is currently active 5 2 3 1 Connection Status Icon Description Controller Disconnected Workbench is trying to establish a connection Controller Connection Closed No controller is found at the given IP address and no connection is made Change the IP address see section 5 9 1 Controller Connected but not ready Controller Connected A controller is present and is connected correctly Controller Negotiating Workbench is performing preliminary communication with the controller Controller Initializing Workbench is waiting for the controller to initialize Controller Negotiation Failed A controller is present at the given IP address but the controller is not valid Change the configuration settings see section 5 9 1 Table 8 Controller Connection Status If there is an IP address conflict change the IP address of the physical Nucleus controller and change the Workbench controller settings see section 5 9 1 5 2 3 2 Checksum
86. on the Fix Widget Behaviors button A window displays showing the screens that contain null behavior widgets 2 Select the screens to be fixed and click OK 3 When complete a summary screen displays indicating the number of changes made Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 42 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Administration 4 8 Sequence Sets 4 9 Sequence Sets are required for soft panel configuration Sequence Sets group the key entry sequences that are required to enter sources and destinations via keypads To add a sequence set e Click on the Add button Key sequences are defined either on the fly using a dial up keypad on a soft panel or in the Key Sequences Editor in Design mode See Key Sequences on page 121 To remove a sequence set e Select a sequence set from the list and click the Remove button Identity The Identity tab lists the Machines External Clients and Internal Clients that are present on the network and are linked to Workbench It identifies which soft panel client has protected a route Machines PCs running Workbench router configuration software External Clients PCs running Workbench soft panels Internal Clients Hardware control panels connected directly to the router controller Page 43 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 Configuration Issue 1 Rev 4 9 1 9 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 Description Configure controllers de
87. on the OID Browse button The Choose DCCP Field window displays Fs Choose Decp Field Generallnfo Ge Configurationitems Gei LaggingSettings Gei Version 4 As Devices d ai Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice Generallnfo Gei LocalRouterContig 4 Gei LocalRouterControl Generallnfo 4 Gei CommonContral Aa PSUFaults 4 As FanFaults a Gei FanFaults 1 Gei Fault False Gei x 0 b ge FanFaults 2 b ge FanFaults 3 b ge FanFaults 4 b ge FanFaults 5 b ge FanFaults 6 Gei FanFaults 7 119939414 Gan Fig 147 Fan Fault OID 5 Navigate to Fan Fault 1 and click OK In this example the associated OID is 1 1 22 3 2 4 1 1 This number will be of use later 6 Click on the Brush Value Settings button The Tally Brush Editor displays Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 152 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples Ta Tally Brushes Editor True EE Default red brush False M Default lime brush Add Delete OK Cancel Fig 148 Tally Brush Editor 7 From the drop down lists select colors for the Image Tally to display when the fan is OK or in fault status In the example screen the Image Tally displays red when the status is True i e the Fan is in fault mode and displays green when the status is False i e the fan is not in fault mode 8 Click OK A 3 6 Add a Label 1 From the Toolbox at the bottom of the screen click the Label control Dr
88. on the panel in override mode and from the menu click on Override Panel The panel is no longer in override mode and any editing of properties affects all panels It is not possible to override the Behavior property of a group or control or the Group property of a control Page 113 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 5 3 3 Detach a Panel 6 6 A panel can be detached from the template so that any further changes to the template do not affect the panel or vice versa To detach a panel e Right click on a panel and from the menu click on Detach Panel Groups The group properties determine the behavior of all the controls within the group and are specific to the device type or piece of equipment that the controls act upon For example in an alarm group only the control behaviors appropriate for alarms are available ainkernad E3 C Fig 98 Group Tabs Icon Description Adds a new group ES Group 1 Edit group name Open group properties nn Select all controls in group y E Delete the current group Table 30 Group Buttons Each screen can have numerous groups and each group can have a different behavior type Table 31 lists the available groups Group Name Description Alarm Allows the alarms to trigger button states and log to the screen For example setting alarms acknowledgements and automatic resets
89. or False Checked and unchecked values can be defined to give these results Only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial up Groups Combo Box A Combo Box allows for selection of a value from a drop down list Image Adds an image stored in the Brush Repository see section 6 13 Use to add a graphic to a button a logo to a panel or an image tally Table 32 Control Panel Controls Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 116 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 7 3 6 7 4 www snellgroup com Design Mode Line Adds a line Initially the line is a diagonal To reposition and resize the line drag the round nodes at each end of the line A To make complex lines right click on the line and select Add Waypoint to add a node in the line Reposition the node to make an angle Any number of waypoints may be added and moved in this way List Box Allows selection of a value from a static list Long lists display a scroll bar for selection of a value not currently visible For Router Devices Source and Destination names including their alternative Tag Names can be changed while in Run mode see section A 4 Text Edits Directly type a value For example a tag name or a video server clip Label Displays any property value or plain text For example can tally back on any routed source E lal Table 32 Control Panel Controls Numeric For examples of how to use Numeric controls see section A
90. out period then this function is automatically disabled and the panel is returned to its previous state Enabling configuration of audio parameters always results in display audio parameters being enabled The N character to denote Normal is only used in AUD parameter pre selecting Usually eighth character is left blank to denote Normal If pre selected route is found to be inhibited from either editable route inhibit table or internal system inhibit table then the destination AUD parameter pre selected is thrown away Page 228 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 D 3 2 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference If a route is protected then AUD parameters and trigger type cannot be changed Rules for 6276 X Y Panels not designated master Only Destination AUD parameters can be assigned from this panel type Eighth character in DESTINATION display is also used to show the pre selected destination AUD parameter when character alternating with Enabling configuration of AUD parameters by pressing lt CONFIG AUDIO gt always results in selector LED being lit against DESTINATION display Operation 1 Press lt DISPLAY AUDIO gt to enable audio parameters to display optional Select DESTINATION display Dial up destination for example VT 3 Press lt CONFIG AUDIO gt selector LED lit against DESTINATION display followed by the required AUD parameter The pre selected AUD parameter is displayed
91. panel templates may be added to a screen Changing a property of the panel causes all the panels linked to the template to change their property at the same time For example changing the color of a button background on a panel causes the same button background to change on all panels Any changes made to the panels are reflected back to the template and the template is updated at the same time The properties of a panel can be changed without changing the template See Override Panels on page 113 Override Panels A panel created from the panel template can be edited without affecting the template by overriding it to change the properties required When in override mode it is not possible to make changes to other panels Also it is not possible to add or remove groups tabs or controls on the selected panel in override mode To override a panel e Right click on the panel and from the menu click on Override Panel Any changes made during the override are not reflected on the other panels nor is the template updated Changing a property on a panel in override mode affects only that particular property and other properties remain as per the template For example changing a button color only in override mode then changing the size of that button on the template results in the button with the override on the color still changing size accordingly with the template To return to editing all panels e Right click
92. proxyChecksum 2424422314 localChecksum 99529986 oid 1 2 4 2 1 ArrayField Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 4273303003 localChecksum 3006607662 oid 1 2 4 2 1 1 CommsType Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 113878551 localChecksum NA oid 1 2 4 2 1 1 2 Close Fig 84 Checksum Information This indicates if there is a difference between the controller configuration and the database configuration 5 8 3 1 2450 Controller For a 2450 controller the checksum is calculated using the configuration stored in the CompactFlash The checksum is calculated at initial startup and following a Push operation when the new configuration is copied to the CompactFlash from RAM If using the Online Editor to make configuration changes these will not affect the checksum Such changes will be overwritten when the controller is rebooted unless a Pull operation is performed to copy the configuration from the RAM to the CompactFlash See Push and Pull Configuration on page 97 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 95 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 8 3 2 246x Controllers For 246x controllers the checksum process Is as follows e Workbench contains a copy of the configuration which can be pushed to the controller and Workbench generates a checksum against this e When a controller boots it loads the pushed configuration and calculates its checksum against this and caches the result Th
93. set for a source This is called RefAuto it automatically sets the reference type based on the signal type detected on the input This allows any signal 625 525 and so on to be connected to that input and the correct reference used for the switch without having to change the database This is useful for SD HD inputs from the same connection Audio Modifies The settings in Audio Modifies specify the manipulation performed on audio streams when routed through the crosspoint The settings specified here are the defaults and can be overridden from a hardware XY control panel during normal operation Audio modifies can act on sources destinations or both e Click Audio Modifies The Audio Modifies Editor window displays p a Audio Modifies Editor con J S ema Sources Destinations Matrix1 Sources SourceAudioNormal v SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioLeftBoth SourceAudioRightBoth SourceAudioSwap SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal a Y mma N reae SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal SourceAudioNormal Copy Paste OK Cancel Fig 62 Audio Modifies Editor Page 65 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 9 9 9 9 www snellgroup com Configuration Table 18 lists the Source Audio Modifies Source Description SourceAudioNormal No aud
94. soft panel check the Run Mode Auto Sequences checkbox in the Dial Up group behaviors Page 121 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 11 2 Key Sequences Editor 6 11 2 1 Buttons on a keypad group can be configured as dial up Sequences which are stored in source and or destination sequence sets Sequence sets are only relevant for soft panels To open the Key Sequences Editor do one of the following e Right click on a panel and select Key Sequences e From the Property window of a dial up group click the Key Sequences button e Click on the Key Sequences tab if it is currently docked otherwise select it from the Screens menu item A NS K Assi t Tools Group Grupit o gt o equence Keys signments VTR Sources Dests salvos Generic 2 ee SS SE ee Dial Up Sequence Matrix Assoc LMatid 5 VTR24 Find Clear Start End Sequences VTR gt 1 gt VTR gt 2 gt 4 gt Edit gt 1 gt Edit gt 2 gt VTR gt 2 gt 6 VTR gt 2 gt 7 VTR gt 2 gt 8 VTR gt 4 gt 0 VTR 24 Re Part Entry ToolBox Key Sequences Ie Fig 110 Key Sequences Editor In Design Mode when the Key Sequences Editor is first opened the first dial up group on the panel is automatically selected If there is more than one dial up gro
95. sure Workbench is not active 2 Open SQL server management express and connect to the server 3 Right click on the Workbench database and select Tasks Back Up The Backup Database Workbench screen displays see Fig 206 P Back Up Database Workbench 2 General Szen Heb H Source Database Workbench Recovery model SIMPLE Backup type Full Copy only Backup Backup component Database 4 d Backup set Name Workbench Full Database Backup RE eg After 0 days A 30 01 2012 N gt On 30 01 201 LT DNH MR 03557 SGLEXPRES Destination Back up to 9 Disk Connection SNELLWILCOXStuartCheer 3 View connection properties Progress Remove Fig 206 Backup Database 4 Select a database backup destination 5 Click OK Page 244 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Databases F2 SQLDBTool The SQLDBTool is available from the Windows Start Menu Start All Programs Snell SQLDBTOOL SQLDBTool Pac cup Available Servers LT DNH MR 03557 SQLEXPRESS v E Include networked SQL servers gt BE SQLDBTool Version 1 0 221 721 Authentication Active IP Addresses SQL SQL Usemame WorkbenchUser 172 31 7 143 SQL Password probel Windows Finding SQL 2005 2008 2008R2 Servers N LT DNH MR 03557 SQGLEXPRESS S LT DNH MR 03557 I SQLEXPRESS V 10 50 1600 1 Datab
96. the Add Port button Select the port just defined from the drop down list in the Port box Edit the End Dest to match that used in the LocalControl port Fig 180 Matrix Ports Example f Fa Port Configuration L Le zs Serial IP Port Configuration Matrix Ports Matrix Ports l e DERES Sie S850A Matrix Port A Port Controller remote Matrix 1 Level 1 Start Dest 1 End Dest 1292 Dest Off 0 Source Off 0 Add Port gt lt Remove Port Port Editor Matrix Port 1 Port LocalControl e Start Dest 1 End Dest 1292 Dest Offset 0 Src Offset 0 Matrix 1 Monitor Offset 0 Port Feature Src Off 0 Level 1 Mon Input Off 0 7 Audio Params E Protects E Connect On Go _ Tally Dump E External Protect Master Assign Defaults Sync Port Push Names to Aurora OK Cancel Apply A 17 Set up Tie lines In this example two single level matrices are already setup and a 2330 controller is used as a tie line controller for three tie lines between the routers A 17 1 Set up a Tie line Controller 1 2 3 4 5 From the Configuration screen add a new blank Centra controller Edit the controller and add a TielinesDevice Click on the Configure Devices button Click on the Edit Tie Lines button The Tie Lines Editor screen displays Page 179 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples Tea Tie L
97. the computer 3 Open SQL server management express and connect to the server using the following Login WorkbenchUser Password probel 22 Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio File Edit View Debug Tools Window Community Help T New Query Lo L GM ch Ka Object Explorer Ex Connect 3 3 2 3 2 3 L LT DNH MR 03557 SQLEXPRESS SQL Ser S Y Databases o La System Databases El E Centra Demo E T SnellLicensing a Ea Security New Database m A Server Objects New Query 4 Replication Script Database as E Management 3 D SQL Server Compact JP El Detach SR Tables Policies Take Offline Vi S EH a Facets Bring Online a LA Programmability LA Replication Start PowerShell Shrink gt Reports Back Up Delete Generate Scripts Files and Filegroups Refresh Extract Data tier Application Transaction Log Properties Register as Data tier Application Import Data Export Data Fig 200 SQL Log in 4 Right click on the Workbench database and select Tasks Restore Database The Restore Database Workbench screen displays This screen has two pages selectable from the Select a page area at the top left of the screen By default the General page is open on startup Page 241 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Databases C gt SS _J Restore Database Workbench o
98. top right of the panel define the number of channels to mix down Configure the channels to mix down starting with Ch 1 Ch 2 and so on without leaving any gaps For example if mixing down six channels ensure that these channels are set up on Ch 1 to Ch 6 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 164 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples 3 Click the appropriate button to set where the audio source is coming from See Table 41 d Set the channel number in the Input Index box and click Set 5 If required apply processing to each of the channels in the same way as in the Gain screen See Gain on page 164 Source Audio Destination Audio Embedded Embedded Processed Gain applied Audio Xpt Off Table 41 Mixer Audio Types A 10 1 6 Stereo Mode For AES and MADI inputs and outputs the stereo pairings can be adjustment using the relevant buttons on the audio processing screen LR Swap Swap the left and right channels of a stereo pair Left Both The left channel of a stereo pair is duplicated for both channels Right Both The right channel of a stereo pair is duplicated for both channels Mono Mix The two channels are mixed down to a mono channel Normal Standard left and right channel pairing A 10 1 7 Sample Rate Conversion Sample Rate Conversion SRC allows the sample rate of audio from the audio crosspoint to be converted to a different sample rate either asynchronously or synchronously to an input reference
99. 0 GPIO11 GPIO12 5V0 2A current limited GND GND When configuring a hardware panel in Design mode 1 The Advanced Panel Configuration screen displays When using a 2330 or 2450 controller or non IP hardware control panels only ports 1 8 Select the Panel Properties and click on the Advanced button in the Panel Type Specific section e a Advanced Panel Configuration Overrides Controllable Levels Controllable Dests Groups Num Groups 1 paros Matrix 1 S840V Destination Matrix S840V d el v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 Clear vi Miscellaneous Level 0 Fig 178 Example GPI Override Setup Inputs Num Inputs 2 Kaes Matrix 1 S840V 2 S840V Source MS s840v 8 vi v3 v4 v5 v6 Clear vi v2 Miscellaneous Code 2 Page 177 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 4 O www snellgroup com Worked Examples Define a number of groups and click on the Apply button in this example 1 Groups allow GPIls to be allocated together or separately as desired For example a single group may contain a number of GPls that route sources to one destination on a single matrix or a number of groups each with one GPI controlling a different input to a different output or any combination in between Select a group to highlight it for editing Click on the Matrix drop down list and select a m
100. 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee teens 9 1 1 IS eg 91010 W 9 1 2 Database Configuration 1 0 0 eee ee eens 9 E EN e gers sare devas orate We eee hee a hh E as 10 1 4 Configurations for Multiple Routers 0 0 0 eee eee 11 Meo MONO CONS icine tener wean a rca a dc da dcp ew ea wee Bs Mi eee ae a 13 Installation EEN 14 2 1 System RequirementS 0 ccc ee ee eee eee eee 14 2 1 1 Minimum Installation Requirements 0 0000 c eee eee eee 14 2 2 Install Workbench 0 0 ce eee ee eee eee 14 2 3 Finish the Installation 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 20 2 4 Manually Installing Components 0 0 00 ccc ee ees 20 2 4 1 Configuration Helper Display 0 0 0 0 cee ees 20 242 SUPPO este ENN Sedo ym Seed sane ce BE A ao OS eed 21 2 4 3 COMPUTO gh nad eer aw dao Ree a e a boa doe Boe 21 2 4 4 Microsoft Data Access Components 0000 cee eee eee 22 2 4 5 Visual C Redistributable 22 CAG DOL EE ae chen DA a Ee ore a eae Gane ch EE area 23 2 4 7 SQL Server Management Gud 23 2 4 8 Workbench Database eee eens 24 2 4 9 Add a Mirrored Gener 0 0000 ccc tenets 25 2 4 10 Create a New Database Using SQLDBTool 26 2 4 11 Create a Blank Database Using GOMES 27 2 4 12 Install Sample Databases 0 0 00 ees 27 ao Ola WOIKDENCI EE 28 2 6 Log Into Workbench 0 ccc ee eee eee eee 29 2A O oi iae ee O 30 2 7 1 Command Line Parameters 0 0 0 cc ee eee 30 ZO Oa IDEDIOV
101. 0 1080 interlaced 50 Hz Ref1080p60 1080 progressive 60 Hz Ref1080p59 1080 progressive 59 Hz Ref1080p50 1080 progressive 50 Hz Reflnput1 to Override the auto detection by using a fixed reference input which allows Reflnput4 for the same standard but offset for timing issues to be resolved Alternatively set a derived reference 246x only See Derived References on page 81 RefAuto Sets the reference type based on the signal type detected on the input Table 17 Switch Points 11 When using RefAuto detected 3G dual link input signals are specified to use the equivalent 1080i references Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 64 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 5 5 5 4 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration e On the Field Frame tab set the switching point to occur on field or frame Field based switch points can only be applied to interlaced formats To set a switching point 1 On the Reference tab select the required reference standards for the matrix To do this do one of the following e Select the Reference standard for each cell individually e Select a group of cells and in the Set drop down list in the lower left corner of the window select a reference standard then click Set e Set one cell and then use the Copy and Paste functions to populate the remainder 2 On the Field Frame tab select Field or Frame as required Click Apply and OK to confirm There is an additional reference type that can be
102. 00 Controller2450 de Unknown Een f d qua Pull Config from Controllers BS Pyxis AA 272x272 Stereo 172 31 9 172 3000 Controller2450 da Primary Unknown Configuration Baca e Pyxis AA 272x272 Stereo 172 31 9 174 2000 Controller2450 S Unknown HI Export Configuration E Import Configuration 172 31 9 175 Controller2450 HI Export All Pyxis AA 288x288 Mono E 172 31 9 17 3000 Controller2450 Unknown gt Import All Controller2450 Primary Unknown Pyxis AA Pyxis AA 544x544 Mono 172 31 9 177 3000 G Reset Dual Redundancy 544x544 Mono 172 31 9 17 3000 Controller2450 Unknown Pyxis AES 144x144 A Ref 172 31 9 17 3000 Controller2450 Primary Unknown p4 R R R R Pyxis AES 144x144 B Ref 172 31 9 18C 3000 Controller2450 Unknown Unpair Controllers Default Nucleus Controllers Fig 40 Networks The database supplied on the Workbench install CD lists numerous router controllers Each controller has a default IP address Each router has the router controller software running on the controller card The controller has a default fixed IP address If the router is connected directly or through a local network Workbench automatically identifies the controller and shows it as connected correctly If the fixed IP addresses of the physical controller causes a conflict on the network change both the IP address
103. 00 and Cygnus routers have 525 625 and HD reference inputs A Nucleus controller Sirius 800 range Cygnus and Pyxis routers automatically detects the incoming reference Therefore it can be configured to switch on a specific standard Page 63 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Important If there is no reference signal or the reference is different to the signal being passed the router switches on receiving the command but does not provide a clean switch e Click References The Switch Points Editor window displays a Switch Points Editor co C fama Reference Field Frame MiLev1 Ref525i59 Ref625i50 Ref720p60 Ref720p59 Ref720p50 Ref1080p60 Ref1080p59 Ref1080p50 Ref1080i60 Ref1080i59 Ref1080i50 0 3 On Vi A WS N Pa Refinput2 Refinput3 Refinput4 RefAuto SDIInputl SDIIn put2 k e k N Pp K e P Us Refinputl E un Refinputl Set Refinputl Set SetAl Copy Paste OK Cancel Fig 61 References Editor The switching points can be set for individual sources and levels Table 17 lists the switching point references Reference Description Ref525159 525 interlaced 59 Hz Ref625150 625 interlaced 50 Hz Ref720p60 720 progressive 60 Hz Ref720p59 720 progressive 59 Hz Ref720p50 720 progressive 50 Hz Ref1080i60 1080 interlaced 60 Hz Ref1080i59 1080 interlaced 59 Hz Ref1080i5
104. 1 1 is received by the card The Contact variable is the text that is returned when the sysContact SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 is received by the card This can be set to the name and or contact details responsible for this equipment The Location variable is the text that is returned when the sysLocation SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 is received by the card This can be set to the physical location of the equipment in the facility The SysName variable is the text that is returned when the SysName SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 5 is received by the card This can be set to the name by which the equipment is locally referred to Page 194 2013 Snell Limited SNMP NumberCommunityGet Names 1 NumberCommunitySet Names 1 TrapManager 1 TrapManagerAddrN 1 72 31 7 133 CommunityGetName N public CommunitySetName N private EnableSnellTraps 1 TrapMessageDelay 10 DisablelnitialNotify 1 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference The NumberCommunityGetNames variable is used to specify how many community get names are listed in the ini file using the CommunityGetNameN variable Up to 2 community strings of up to 20 characters in length can be specified for get operations This is typically set to 1 The NumberCommunitySetNames variable is used to specify how many community get names are listed in the ini file using the CommunitySetNameN variable Up to 2 community strings of up t
105. 1s0004 m01s0005 m01s0005 m01s0006 m01s0006 m01s0007 m01s0007 m01s0008 m01s0008 m01s0009 m01s0009 m01s0010 m01s0010 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 pr pa ka m01s0011 m01s0011 pa N m01s0012 m01s0012 12 mA ANNI mM ANNI 4 Export Import All 4 Character 8 Character 12 Character 16 Character 32 Character Tag Name OK Cancel Fig 49 Names Editor The Names Editor has different main tabs for naming the following e Sources e Destinations e Source Associations e Destination Associations e Salvos A filter is available in a number of the tabs to quickly find sources and destinations e Enter alphanumeric characters into the search bar for example VTR or Edit 1 and click on the Filter button The display changes to show only the items containing the filter text in the source or destination name e Click on the Clear button to remove a filter Q Filter Clear Fig 50 Filter The tabs at the bottom display All 4 character 8 character 12 character 16 character 32 character or Tag names Changing a Source or Destination name in one character format does not change the corresponding source or destination in all other character formats The names default to the names from the 16 character format Page 54 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 5 5 2 1 5 5 3 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Import and Export Names N
106. 4 Click to form the connection Pins with cables attached are shown with a bold outline Fig 134 Cable Connections 8 7 1 Cable Routing To make system architecture drawings easier to understand add corners to a cable To create corners on a cable 1 When in cable mode move the mouse over the cable The cursor changes to a pen shape when over the cable 2 Click and drag to position a corner 3 Release the mouse button to fixed the position of the corner Multiple corners can be added to aid clarity of a diagram Existing corners can be repositioned by selecting the node and moving it Server 1 Fig 135 Cable Routing Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 142 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples Appendix A Worked Examples The following examples assume a working installation and pre configured controllers A 1 XY Soft Panel A 1 1 Create New Panel Fig 136 shows the finished panel it has four sources and four destinations The route for each signal is set by selecting a destination then a source and clicking the Take button Screen i gt Take O P 0001 OF 0002 O P 0003 O P 0004 Fig 136 XY Panel With a Take Button Prerequisites A device controller or simulator must be attached for the following procedure to work correctly A 1 1 1 Add New Screen 1 Open the Workbench Design window By default the first time the Design window is openea
107. 4 Page 153 2013 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Worked Examples AA Live Renaming of Sources and Destinations For Router Devices the Source and Destination names including their alternative Tag Names can be changed while in Run mode Add a new Group set the Group behavior to Tag Name Editing Behavior and set the Controller to a valid Router Device Controller Add a List Box and give it an appropriate name Set the behavior to Property Selection From the Behavior Specific section set the Array to SourceAssocs or DestAssocs see Fig 149 Behaviour Specific Ama S ES fot Version E Lei RouterController Oid da Matrices E Gei Matrices 1 As Levels Property Ee SourceAssocs m SourceAssocs 1 ES Lei SourceAssocs 2 2 Behaviour Fig 149 List Box Array Selection From the Behavior Specific section set the Property to the name to be selected see Fig 150 In Run mode the list box displays the list of Names Behaviour Specific o Behaviour Km DI SourceAssocs 1 1 1 3 i a Did EN Property i Lei Version Z E Lei RouterController A Aa Matrices Behaviour E Ze Matrices 1 Behaviour SI da avale Group El As SourceAssocs Name E Le Sourcedssocs 1 Fig 150 List Box Property Selection Workbench 1 2 3 4 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 154 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 5 Numeric Controls T
108. 44 LogTools General Initialising licensing al 03 01 2012 02 214 INFO 6744 LogTools General Licensing disabled 03 01 2012 02 217 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup Creating a new instance of ModelRoot 03 01 2012 02 217 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup About to call SetupData0bjectsDotNet 03 01 2012 02 223 INFO 6744 LogTools Sear cip DO NET setup started 03 01 2012 02 239 INFO 6744 LogTools General Returning connection URL mssql work 03 01 2012 02 638 INFO 6744 LogTools General Returning connection URL mssql work 03 01 2012 02 638 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup Connected to mssql workbenchuser pr 03 01 2012 702 652 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup Configuring domain 03 01 2012 02 657 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup About to register Probel mMcM Modelstc 03 01 2012 03 019 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup About to register Probel MCM Security 03 01 2012 03 020 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup About to register Probel mcm Licencir 03 01 2012 703 020 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup About to register Probel RulesEngine 03 01 2012 170 INFO 6744 LogTools li 4 ConfigureDomain Finished 03 01 2012 172 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configDirectory Appl 03 01 2012 172 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configDirectory Datt 03 01 2012 172 DEBUG 6744 LogTools General About to get DirectoryHelper DriversDi 03 01 2012 172 DEBUG 6744 Lo
109. 48 destination Level 2 32 sources 32 destinations Level 3 32 sources 32 destinations Level 4 32 sources 32 destinations Fig 47 Router Configuration Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 52 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 9 9 1 5 5 2 www snellgroup com Configuration The controller has a default fixed IP address If the router is connected directly or through a local network Workbench automatically identifies the controller and shows it as connected correctly If the fixed IP addresses of a physical controller causes a conflict on the network change both the IP address of the router controller and the IP address of the controller listed in Workbench Router Configuration e Click Router Configuration The Router Database Configuration window displays a Router Database Configuration mem Controllers Matrices Levels Router Controllers Matrices Salvos a OK Cancel Fig 48 Router Database Configuration Window Tab Description Controllers Set the number of Matrices and Salvos Matrices The number of Matrices is set on the Controllers tab For each Matrix set the name and number of levels Levels The number of levels for each Matrix is set on the Matrices tab For each Matrix and Level set the name and number of Sources and Destinations To automatically calculate the number of Source and Destination Associations click the Auto Calcul
110. 5 8 Controller Configuration Editors 93 5 8 1 Generic dor 94 5 6 2 Online EdIOT 24 4 5 lt 06604646 44246 406006 6 wales 6O6S8 ae ae 95 58 3 CHECKSUM W 95 5 9 Controller Management 96 5 9 1 Edit Controller IP Address or Name 0 0 00 cc eee 96 5 9 2 Push and Pull Configuration 20 0 ee ee 97 5 9 3 Configuration Backup 98 EE og ea E EN E E E E ees 98 5 9 5 Dual Redundancy 0 cc eee nee eens 98 DO MEMES ca oasis dere desa E E weds 99 5 9 7 Advanced EE 100 5 9 8 Delete RollCall Cache 104 5 9 9 Convert a Nucleus 2450 Controller to a 246x Controller 104 SOTO Bee lee He Te i aisea a aa a a a a a a aa ead aa 105 6 Design Te e CEET 106 O BR d lee EE 106 M0 A 106 e EE Ee EE Eed EE EE e geg 108 AS 2k cco Cae aew ee oud Bae OEE MERE OE AED RE Ree tebe eane Be 108 6 4 1 Create a New Blank Screen 0 0 0 ee eee 109 6 4 2 SCreens Edun 4c2 2cenen porras Boaw nee be eax 110 6 4 3 Screen Templates 111 DOOM erre sara da e dada ns a o aaa sas 112 6 5 1 Hardware PanelS 0 00 ee ee ee ees 112 65 2 SOMO erre a ao ea et bb N 112 6 5 3 Panel TemplatesS oooooooooronnar nents 112 Page 4 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com AC 24 EN dE een ee a E eg 114 O IOOIDOX EE 115 Ole LAVOUL sr oracion etd ee ee RE dl E 116 EE ee e abana arcas y bak hee PE ade arde bd A eae oc EC 116 6720 NUMCHC s0040 05 6 24408 be baed nove b
111. 58 The second level requires an offset so that logical source 1 maps to physical source 16 Dest 1 Dest 16 Source 1 Level cl Source 16 Level le Fig 58 Source Offsets Example Page 61 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration 5 5 5 Advanced Configuration 9 9 9 1 To access the Advanced Configuration options click on the Advanced Configuration button qe Levels A level is a logical grouping of inputs and outputs which may or may not have a direct correspondence with a particular piece of hardware Typically a level depends on operational requirements and represents groups of inputs and outputs such as video or audio or data e Click Levels The Levels Configuration Editor window displays Note These router control settings should only be altered when configuring advanced features such as R5422 levels audio modifies and park sources For standard ro Matrices Levels Type Park Mode Park Source Park Dest Routing Mode Direction Matrix 1 Level 1 DigitalVideo v7 Automatic Y lt Clear gt lt Clear gt OneToOne 7 Forward v Matrix 2 A Level 2 DigitalVideo vw Automatic lt Clear gt lt Clear gt sl OneToOne 7 Forward z Level 3 DigitalVideo v Automatic el lt Clear gt w lt Clear gt v OneToOne Y Forward v Level 4 D
112. 6 11 6 11 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Design Mode Each entry in the controller s database has an OID address Object Identifier Navigate to the required OID either from the Behavior drop down list or click the button to open the Choose Dccp Field browser see Fig 108 Valid OID values are colored green Invalid OID values are colored red The OID can be dragged and dropped or copied and pasted to the relevant DCCP behavior of another control It is possible to globally change the OID address for all Screen Objects and Rules through the Configuration OID Rewriter Helper Key Names Assign names numbers to buttons either using the pre defined key names or customized key names as applicable Key Names Dx Sort by order added 1 2 3 A 5 6 T 8 g m a ST D Add name Remove selected Fig 109 Key Names To add a caption to a button e Drag a name or a number from the Key Names list to a button on a panel The name or number is applied as a caption to the button To add a new name e Type a name in the text entry box and click Add name The new name is added to the Key Names list for future use Key Sequences Run Mode Key Sequences Key sequences can be automatically set from a dial up keypad in Run mode negating the need to set them up in the first instance in the Key Sequences Editor To set run mode key sequences e Inthe Property window of a dial up
113. 9 S 5X T S o e e apes ab QO202 we RRF OGROKOE OOS eg o o 3 2 0 3 5 2 2 2 2 o 2 2 2 gt 2 3 53292 EI SS Sl S S a e vn S adi dl Si slo go o eg og oO o 222224000068 OOTTTT222222000600 9F X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X XX X X X X x x X X X KX A KX K A A X X X X X X X X X X xX GA a E d CN o EE A gi AE S Se AE d 5 20 o oO o o A gt 550 o o 203050 gx FAs 9 3 83 SAAANA ss o D ax S D WW OD eo o o o SES 22 ats cial 2 200000 28 88 oe os D o ZS ZS ZS ZS 2 3Z0000 gt e ENS E MS teta o o e ls O go oe og oO o 35333330V oooO e ae TEITE SS SS ee X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX 1X X X X X X X X X X A X 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com E 2 11 Label Behavior Device Chain Generic Dial Up Audio Router XY Group Generic Alarm Audio Path Audio Processing Audio Router XY Track Active Chain Base OID Value X Block Information Chain Count Controller Active X X x X X X X X x lt x lt Controller Connection X X X X X X X X Cue To DCCP behavior xX x X Destination Main Signal Name Destination Main Signal Pin X Dial Up Selection Tally Duration Forward Tally X X xX Get Position Group Preset Tally Group Tally Local Time l X Xx X lt x X XxX X Monitor Tally X Page Index X xX X Page Index Preset X X xX Page Number x X Passive default X X x X X X X IN
114. 93 kB Fig 29 Pbak Deploy Tool 2 8 2 Configuration Set the Target Drive 1 Select File Configuration 2 Select the Target Drive from the drop down list 3 Set the RTB directory on the computer If the default folders are installed browse to the folders located in the Workbench installation folder MCM Controllers The DAT directory and On time tools directory are not relevant for Workbench configuration Long network paths should be avoided otherwise Pbak Deploy may not work correctly 4 Click OK 2 9 Configuration Helper Utility The Configuration Helper can be accessed from the Windows Start menu in case further configuration is necessary after the initial installation Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Configuration Helper Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 31 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com General Operation 3 General Operation 3 1 Screen Layout 3 1 1 Home Screen The home screen displays large icons for easy access to the main modes of the Workbench Oy HD Centra Workbench user Administration Architecture Fig 30 Home Screen A toolbar at the top of the screen is available in all modes except Run mode which displays in a new window and provides quick access from one mode to another without the need to go to the Home Screen each time In addition each mode can be selected from the drop down menu displayed when clicking on the main menu button
115. Assigned Devices Sirius 840 AlarmDevice LocalRouterDevice AxonDevice PanelDevice Ls x RouterDevice DartnetGatewayDevice DensiteDevice FieldStoreDevice GPIDevice KeypadsDevice LookupDevice MDUDevice MultiViewerDevice pb 616 bs 6 E B amp B 9 Show Routing Devices Only Fig 75 Add Remove Devices 3 Further devices can be viewed by unchecking the Show Routing Devices checkbox 4 Click on the button of the required device The device name moves from the Available Devices field to the Assigned Devices field on the screen 5 Add further devices if required in the same manner 6 Click on the Configure Devices button This returns to the previous screen allowing for configuration of the new device s 7 Select the appropriate device and then click on the relevant Configure Edit or Add button on the right hand side of the screen Some devices cannot be configured from this screen and do not display any buttons on the right hand side of the screen Such devices must be configured using the Generic Editor See Generic Editor on page 94 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 86 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 5 7 2 Available Devices www snellgroup com Configuration The Devices tab specifies the type of device or devices that are to be controlled Table 26 lists the options for a generic controller Device AlarmDev
116. Audio Matrix 4 0 Level 1 E m02d0001 Source 0 E m02d0002 Source 0 F m02d0003 Source 0 m02d0004 Source 0 m02d0005 Source 0 m02d0006 Source 0 m02d0007 Source 0 F m02d0008 Source 0 m02d0009 Source 0 m02d0010 Source 0 C m02d0011 Source 0 m02d0012 Source 0 PF m02d0013 Source 0 PF m02d0014 Source 0 E Select Deselect All Fig 89 Snapshot Editor Showing Crosspoints Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 101 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Controllers that are not currently connected online have Offline appended to the controller name in the display Any of the crosspoints may be edited at any time within the Snapshot Editor window Selecting Crosspoints e Click to open a controller and subsequently the matrices and levels below each to view individual destinations and currently routed source e Click di at each level to close the levels matrices and controller Clicking af at the controller level closes everything below that controller e Toggle the checkboxes as required to select deselect individual or groups of crosspoints At the bottom left of the window is a checkbox for selecting and deselecting all crosspoints To select a block of crosspoints on a particular controller enter start and end values in the Range boxes Saving a Snapshot e To save the current router crosspoints as a snapshot file click Save Ta Save Snapshot OU e
117. Audio Path Allows monitoring of the routes that individual audio channels take Audio Processing For defining audio processing screens Audio Router XY Controls for designing audio routing screens allowing groups of Group audio for example stereo pairs to be routed and embedded onto a video stream for output Audio Router XY Controls for designing audio routing screens allowing audio tracks Track to be routed and embedded onto a video stream on output Device Chain Not for general use used with mimic Generic Allows control or status monitoring from any part of any device through the unique OID identifier For use with drag and drop design Note For generic group behaviors it is possible to assign a property that may be inappropriate for a control Generic Dial Up Allows for large sized routers to be controlled by a single panel Hardware Panel BPX For configuring BPX hardware panels Using the template in the Screen Editor is recommended Hardware Panel For configuring 6277 hardware panels Using the template in the MultiBus Screen Editor is recommended Table 31 Group Behaviors Page 114 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 7 www snellgroup com Design Mode Group Name Hardware Panel XY Hardware Panel XY6276 Mimic Multi Bus Multi Matrix BPX Multi Matrix Multi Bus Multi Matrix XY MultiViewer Device Passive default Playout Device Router BPX Router Dial Up Router XY Source Queue
118. Innovation in the Multi Screen World User Manual Workbench Create and Customize User Interfaces for Router Control snellgroup com Workbench www snellgroup com Information and Notices Issue 1 Rev 4 Copyright and Disclaimer Information and Notices Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitation material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as icons screen display looks etc Information in this manual and software are subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Snell Limited The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and can not be reproduced or copied in any manner without prior agreement with Snell Limited or their authorized agents Reproduction or disassembly of embedded computer programs or algorithms prohibited No part of this publication can be transmitted or reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopy recording or any information storage and retrieval system without permission being granted in writing by the publishers or their authorized agents Snell operates a policy of continuous improvement and development Snell reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described i
119. Nabd EES 200 B31 AA II a E aa a a e e be eE A 200 B 3 2 246x Firmware Update 200 B 3 3 246x Controller TED 201 B 3 4 246x Configuration ie 203 B 3 5 RollCall Operation 204 B 4 RollCall Gateway 205 Appendix C Routers Heierence nanana eens 206 Esch Pyxis ROUTETS a a aosa hd mrii e 6 de enc Bs KC GER A EE E ECH 206 C 1 1 Install the Sample Pyxis Database o ooocooocoooononooo oo 206 C 1 2 Sample Controllers 0 0 0 00 eee 207 E Sample Panels o2sc2e2cesicseiusreteahobmssoadieeSeensedesed 209 C 1 4 Pyxis Module Locations 210 C 2 SINUS 800 ROUIEIS EE 212 C 2 1 Sirius 850 Module Locations 212 C 2 2 Sirius 840 Module Locations 214 C 2 3 Sirius 830 Module Locations 216 SERIO o An 218 C 3 1 Module Locations 218 C 3 2 Example Module Us 219 Appendix D Hardware Panels Reference o o ooooococoocoono 220 D 1 Supported Hardware Panel 220 Dll UR optado Geet oboe ae esa nas 220 D12 20 EE 222 D 2 Panel Features Ee erennere daba ss a aaa dos bt 222 D 2 1 Special Functions 222 D ZP E EE dE EE 222 BRA A 223 D 2 4 Next and PreviouS 1 0 0 ee eens 223 BC e EE 223 D 2 6 DeshHident 2c c aceceotad neos dud eet prensas iaa s e 223 D 2 7 Level BUttonS o o oooooooner eens 223 AE O MP 224 B20 Clean EE 224 D 2 10 Controllable Destinations 0 0 0 0 00 ees 224 D 2 11 Destination Keypads 0 0 eee eee 224 D 2 12 Source Keypads
120. Output 0 Output 0 Oo DD Output A 13 5 Setup a Mimic Soft Panel To setup a mimic diagram on a soft panel only two special controls are used the mimic box and the block selector All the other controls are standard buttons and labels Fig 177 shows a completed mimic screen in design mode Target Block Fig 177 Completed Mimic Screen Mimic Prompt Message Page 175 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples To set up a basic mimic panel 1 2 10 Create a new panel Create a group and set the group behavior to Mimic Behavior Set up the group behavior by assigning a tie lines controller and choosing a monitoring device and input Add a Mimic box to the panel ensure it is in the correct group and set the behavior to Mimic Box Various display options are available in the property editor for this control Add a Block Selector to the panel and set the behavior to Block Selector Various display options are available in the Property Editor for this control Add five buttons to set the mimic mode Monitor Route Insert Remove and Replace Set the button text and behavior as appropriate Add a text label and set the behavior to Prompt Message This displays instructions Alter the wording of the messages via the property editor Add a text label and set the behavior to Target Block This displays the name of the selected target block Add buttons for
121. PT RI 197 XPT 3 195 XPT 4 196 Outputsand TNV Y PORDAZEA Monitor see Ssk8sssss Table 52 Sirius 840 Slot Module Address Locations 111 Redundant Crosspoint Module Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 215 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 N 18 109 13 110 14 111 15 112 16 234 113 17 114 18 Routers Reference OO OO se ON CO t e DN ON ON NN OO OO se ON CO st e DN ON ON ON ON OO OO se ON CO t e DN ON ON ON ON moor OD O rrer r N WI Y YY Y es 2013 Snell Limited Workbench C 2 3 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Routers Reference Sirius 830 Module Locations For each router it is important that the correct module addresses are set in the Workbench controller configuration If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set Any modules that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule Multiviewer Output Modules l il Multiviewer Crosspoint p Module or Input Output ET ll Monitoring Module Kl a S E HS o a En Z H Audio Crosspoint i Modules il allt 1164040004 Input Modules Output Modules Video Crosspoint Modules Control Fan Out Modules Nucleus Controllers x 2 d EN Fig 197 Sirius 830 Card Locations Front View Page 216 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com C 2 3 1 Sirius 830 Controller Modu
122. Pyxis Routers C 1 1 Install the Sample Pyxis Database The sample database for Pyxis routers has several example controllers and hardware panels and are installed as part of the Workbench installation To install the sample database 1 10 11 12 13 Browse to Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Example Databases The example databases are in zip folders Right click the DefaultPyxisControllersV3_9 zip and select Extract All the Extraction Wizard displays Browse to an appropriate location for the files and click Next The files are extracted to the selected location Click Finish Make sure that Workbench is NOT open Open SQL server management express and connect to the server Right click on the Workbench database and select Tasks Restore Database In the Source for restore section select From device and click the browse button The Specify Backup dialog box displays click Add Locate the WorkBenchPyxisDefaultControllersMCMV3_9 bak file select it and then click OK In the Specify Backup dialog box click OK Select the file from the Select the backup sets to restore section of the Restore Database dialog box In the Select a page section click Options Select Overwrite the existing database and Leave the database ready to use RESTORE WITH RECOVERY Click OK Start Workbench Page 206 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 C 1 2 C 1 2 1 C 1 2 2 C 1 2
123. SRV1 OPS Fig 173 Pin Settings A 13 3 Router Matrix The matrix device on the system architecture must also be associated with a matrix within a router controller This is done via the Property Editor see Fig 174 Background IIA J a Behaviour Controller Routers ee Matrices 1 zs Cid 1141 1 Information Meceriston Fig 174 Router Matrix A 13 4 Re entrant Devices The device must be displayed as a block This is also done via the Property Editor Location l Mimic Category Reentrant Show on Mimic Fig 175 Re entrant Devices A signal path must be set up within the device Since the modular devices here are not router devices the mimic requires some information on which pins connect to which This is done via the Mimic tab in the pins editor see Fig 175 For each pin enter the number of the pin to which it connects Fig 176 shows the signals that are to be traced from pin 1 and pin 5 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 174 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snel Igroup com Worked Examples A Pin Editor Pin connections for Name HD SDIIP 1 HD SDI IP 2 SYNC REF IP HD SDI OP 1 HD SDI OP 2 HD SDI LOOP SYNC OUT A A A A A V YF YF FF REF LOOP Fig 176 Mimic Pin Settings device Names and Connections Display Mimic Directior Signal Pz Show on Input 3 E Input 0 Input 0 Input 0 Output D Output 0
124. See SQL Server on page 23 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 23 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 4 8 Workbench Database Important The Workbench database must be installed on the server Therefore unless already installed install SQL Server Express and SQL Server Management Studio or optional SQLDBTool on the server Workbench requires a working connection to the Workbench database Until connected to the database the Install Helper displays the connection as red required by Workbench but not yet installed guratior Help Connection strin Data Source localhost SQLEXPRESS Initial Catalog Workbench User 9 ID WorkbenchUser Password probel Server connection status Failure A network related or instance specific error occurred while establishing a connection to SQL Server The server was not found or was not accessible Connection message Verify that the instance name is correct and that SQL Server is configured to allow remote connections provider SQL Network Interfaces error 26 Error Locating Server Instance Specified Database status Unknown H If you wish to use a remote server or a different version of SQL Server click the button below to alter connection settings Click here to alter database connection settings Send to Clipboard Fig 21 Workbench Database There are two options for connecting to a Workbench database e Create a new blank database e Connect to an
125. Siz El Pictures g Sa Le Button maps 30 11 2012 12 57 File folder ideos EN salvo csv 27 07 2012 11 07 Microsoft Office E 1 KB Bc kel snapshot csv 13 12 2012 08 14 Microsoft Office E 2 KB 0 omputer EA 3 Sch a KN tielines csv 15 03 2012 15 49 Microsoft Office E 1 KB F OSDisk C E SD Disk E L StuartCheer sr L root snellwilcc Control and Mor __ My Web Sites on __ Routing and Mul __ Routing on intrar Cu Network ze File name snapshot csv e esv files csv kd Fig 92 Load Snapshot File In the dialog box that displays browse to the location where the snapshot files are saved select the file and click Load The snapshot is loaded and the screen displays all of the crosspoints that are available in that snapshot file Offline crosspoints are shown The following options are available e Edit crosspoints and re save the snapshot file or save as a new snapshot See Saving a Snapshot on page 102 e Take the selected crosspoints See Take on page 103 Take Take sets the crosspoints on the live system to those that are currently selected in the Snapshot Editor Unselected crosspoints are not Taken e Click Take A dialog box displays asking for confirmation of the Take Do you wish to Take everything selected in this Snapshot This will set 96 crosspoints on a live system Are you sure you want to do this Yes JU No Fig 93 Take
126. TOO EE 31 2 8 1 Description A eer edb alee ea ee ede eee Oe ee a 31 2 8 2 Configuration n daz aos Gegen deere io arene det andi wh eee se da a 31 2 9 Configuration Helper Ulm 31 3 General Operation 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 32 Se MOST A Ee EE 32 3 1 1 Home Screen anaana anaana 32 3 1 2 Mode Windows 33 3 2 RUN GGG EE 34 Did MANOS U RA E II 34 PALOG EE re e WE deur ane ee Ek Es 35 3 9 Exit ele Le EE 35 4 Administration ee ee ee ee es 36 4 1 Description 36 EE 36 4 2 1 Add a New eer 37 42 2 Delete AMO om oe eee ee ob 84 ge a nee Sees ee E 37 E ee SE EE ee E EE SE GS a a 38 AS Doral ROS ecca wade re daa oa iaa di as a ads 38 4 3 2 Add a New ole 1 2 0 ee eee eee 38 4 3 3 Membership 4 25 25 640 40oede b edvee deat Oho cee he se eos bees Beas 39 4 4 Screen Permissions 40 4 5 Controller Permissions A NN NEIER IER badass dra aa NEIE EN EENS naa 41 ALO LOCKING m0 oia a oe kw Deel de AG ED e e ta ee A a ek a we A ak ce 41 4 7 Data Management 42 4 7 1 Screen Management 42 4 7 2 Database Repair 0 0 cee eee eens 42 Page 3 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com 4 8 Sequence eis 43 AO EEN E ee et a hc eae ead eee Bae eee en eo eG 43 5 Configuration cuida adopta Son a aaa daa Gow S EE AS 44 Det DESCHOUOM 265 06eev eee Phen e ei coe oe RE ee EE ee reg 44 9 2 Screen LAVOUl sessa eiriaa haea d N a E sodhebwedbd onus EE geg soe 44 5 2 1 Sample Contr
127. To a point in time Source for restore Specify the source and location of backup sets to restore Fm tao p From device B Select the backup sets to restore wm Name Component Type Server Database Position First LSN Last L Connection Server LT DNH MR 03557 SQLEXPRES Connection SNELLWILCOX StuartCheer a View connection properties Fig 203 Restore Options 12 Click OK 13 Start Workbench the database needs to be updated Fig 204 shows the initial screen Fig 204 Update Database To view the differences between the databases click the button The Database Analyzer displays indicating the parts of the database that will change when the database is updated see Fig 205 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 243 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Databases Database Analyzer Probel MCM ModelStore dll 4 Probel MCM RulesEngine dll ApplicationAction t Q DecpAction Q DecpCallFunctionAction DecpConnectionInput t DecpCopyInputAction 9 DecpIncrementValueAction 9 DecpInput DecpSetValueAction EqualityOperator GreaterThanOperator LessThanOperator LookupOperator t 9 ValueComparisonOperator a Unchanged Added Removed Changed show Uncheng Fig 205 Database Analyzer F 1 2 Backup a Database A backup of the Workbench database should be kept To backup a database 1 Make
128. Watchdog disabled Serial Link Between Controllers Displays the status of the serial link between the active and idle controllers See LED 5 for further information e Blue pulsing Green Link okay data is being transferred e Green pulsing Blue Link okay no data is being transferred e Magenta pulsing Blue Link error no connection with the other controller Indicates the other controller is not present not running or the serial link is not working e Orange Pulses Error received data for unconfigured device Indicates the other controller is configured differently from the controller receiving the data or it has no configuration e Red Pulses Error received data with invalid format Serial Data Replication Local Router Device The Serial Link is used to replicate LocalRouter device data between the active and idle controllers Replicated data includes crosspoint status module configuration and port configuration e Off Active Controller e Flashing Green Idle controller receiving background update data e Flashing Orange Idle controller data synchronisation with Active controller in progress Not used Not used 246x Controller LEDs Page 202 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 3 4 246x Configuration File The following code shows a sample config xml file Update the config xml file to reflect the controller s IP address and other networki
129. a InternalProtectNames ba ExternalProtectNames Namel mbDisa0010 1 1 1 3 10 1 3 Push Branch To Controller 53 Push Branch To Controller OK Cancel Apply Fig 83 Generic Configuration Editor Offline Care should be taken when using the Generic Editor It is very easy to change the configuration so that the controller no longer functions correctly and in a way that is difficult to fault find For example changing the baud rate can stop the controller from communicating correctly if a device has not had the same change in baud rate The controller s configuration parameters display in a tree e Click ona symbol to expand the node below it e Click ona af symbol to collapse the node The nodes depend on the type of device Removing an item from the middle of an array can break the controller and links to soft panels There are three types of controls used to build the configuration Depending on the selection the appropriate control displays at the bottom of the screen see Table 28 and Fig 83 Control Description Plus minus symbols These controls add or remove an element below the selected node Drop down lists If the selected configuration parameter is defined by a set group of choices a drop down list enables the value to be selected Text boxes If the selected configuration parameter requires a name a text box enables the name to be entered Table 28 Generic Configura
130. a a eee eae ees 238 E 2 12 Composite Slider 0 0 eee nes 239 2 15 o 4a gteke sone oboe e eee tee ee ab ae eee be eae we 239 EL IAUN DOWN WEE OS ee es 239 E 2 15 Hyperion Thumbnail 0 0 00 ee ee 239 E2 16 J09 E UE 239 EL OS BUNONS s a erro e a co a a e Eae e Bae e ti ae eae 239 E 2 18 Media Player EE 240 E2 A co o AR 240 E 2 20 Source QUES EEN EN EIS SEN A Ne a EIERE STE RL vd 240 E 2 21 Web Browser 240 E222 Dal EE ase e ocd oso E E E Ganon Stead 240 M0 lo A E E a a a aa e aaa 240 E 2 24 Round EE e CEET 240 E 2 25 Device Selector o oooooooooooorn eee ens 240 E220 MIMIC BOX oaessuagerusoasssadse seed oe dees due sees suede 240 E 2 27 Device Chain Box 240 E 2 28 Device Selector 0 1 ce teen nes 240 Appendix F Databases 0 0 0 0 eee ene 241 F 1 SQL Server Management Studio 241 F 1 1 Restore a Database ee eens 241 F 1 2 Backup a Database oooocococococon 244 Fe OQLOBTOO dE e EELER roer EE ee eee ae ae oes 245 F 2 1 Restore a Database 0 eens 245 F 2 2 Backup a Database nnna aaaea 245 F 3 Aurora Nebula Importer 246 F 4 Importing a Database 1 0 tenes 246 F 5 Imported Dalida EE 247 Page 8 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Introduction 1 Introduction Issue 1 Rev 4 1 1 1 2 Description Workbench provides a unified environment for control and monitoring of Snell and third party products It is used to create and
131. aaedapees dase ae bonne sean 117 6 7 4 Advanced op a Bawaba ea aoe Me do ded ct nd ah ee ch ew oe ede ard 117 6 7 5 Meters and Charte 118 6 720 WING 2 outa eae sua Aes eee boo do eos Ob eee oot anew ean es 118 6 7 7 Device Galas dada 52 40 4 abs iaa E eee whens 118 6 8 Property Window 1 0 cc eee ee eee eee 119 6 9 DEVICE EXDIOIl voor rar ona 120 6 9 1 DCCP Behavior asad a ki tend en ade AE eee ee bad new 120 6 10 KEY NameServer LER AWAD ONE OSE ORG EE OSS 121 6 11 Key Sequences re ir rs H deans ia RE TEEN de e ede hoes 121 6 11 1 Run Mode Key Sequences 2 0c ce eee 121 6 11 2 Key Sequences Editor 0 0 0 ccc eee 122 C2 AIO LEON e Ne E ES ae 124 6 12 1 Automatically Assign a Dial up Keypad cee 124 6 12 2 Automatic Key Assignment 0 0 00 ees 124 A 2c ee EE EE dane keane Ooh E eee e sees x 125 6 191 Add a BUS EE 126 6 13 2 Clone a TRIER te A A Beh ba Search de ec sae AEN ech oi dee We ca 126 Glos ele Re AR 126 6 13 4 Linear and Radial Gradient 126 CASO NMACCS es 65 nib RBS DOSES SOE CELE aed ewe Ee 127 6 13 6 Rename a Brush 0 anaa ee 127 SEET ao saab a dace He oe ee Wola ws hh Paine aod Ah Ge do Gee ee wo 128 7A DOSCUDRON separa Soom ee EE EE 128 2 USS ECO gt daawee ea we oo hee ene haa hee eee ade aS e 128 o EE 129 TAY TOODO 4 2 eek et a ech a deh eee ind were Be ae bo eos es eS Hed Bee ee 129 TAA MODUS ee E re ee coe eee EE es 129 TA2 ODS AIS Eeer oes be A y eee hese oa ee
132. ab select Sources or Destinations or BPX Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 124 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 13 www snellgroup com Design Mode r Ta Auto Edit elek Helpers Properties Generic Helper Selection Helper BPX Associations x Helper Arrangement Single Destination Incrementing Sources v Assign destination association to widgets Assign source associations to widgets incrementally starting from Source Association Matrix z 1 2 3 1 Matrix1 D1 D1 Di Destination Association D e e 1 Studio 1 e GA o1 o Source Association ST ss s9 D1 D1 D1 1 VTR1 m OK Cancel Fig 113 Automatic Key Assignment 6 Select Matrix and Association from the drop down lists and click OK Each button is assigned a caption To edit the button labels select the buttons and from the behavior section select the Content Type and Destination Name Length Brushes The Brush Repository is used to create a palette of colors and images Objects such as panels and buttons can be colored with a brush from the repository and graphics or logos may be added to screens To open the Brush Repository click the g button The Brush Repository is also available from the Controller Configuration Routers Icons section M Brus ch Heposibory Solld colour Si een GLP E Type arm Dead ora A Dolai am Dehau sisian Dei
133. ace the screen color changes A 1 1 4 Modify Group Behavior 1 From the Behavior drop down list select Router XY Behavior The full properties for this router are shown 2 Select a Matrix and Level from the drop down lists 3 Make sure Takes Required is set to Single 4 Make sure the Use Association Names checkbox is checked The Association Names are set in the Controller Configuration Router properties A 1 1 5 Add Source Buttons 1 On the toolbar set the Create Grid button to Rows 1 and Columns 4 and click the Grid button The background color of the grid button changes indicating that it is selected Fig 137 Grid Button 2 From the Toolbox at the bottom of the screen click the Button control Drag the cursor and place the buttons on the screen If the Create Grid button is not toggled on then only a single button is added Button Button Button an Fig 138 Add Buttons Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 144 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 1 1 6 Move Buttons To move the buttons 1 Either move them individually or hold the Ctrl key down and drag the cursor around the buttons to multiple select them or hold the Shift key and click individual buttons to select a number of them 2 Drag the buttons to the required positions or enter values in the property window Fig 139 Multiple select Buttons A 1 1 7 Set Button Sources
134. ag the cursor and place the label on the panel directly below the Image Tally 2 Inthe Property Window select the Group defined above from the drop down list 3 Select Passive from the Behavior drop down list 4 Edit the text to change the name to Fan 1 A 3 7 Add More Image Tallies Due to the similar nature of the alarms being setup in this example there are various shortcuts that can be taken to create the panel 1 Copy and paste the Image Tally and Label 2 Select the copied Label and from the Property window change the name to Fan 2 3 Select the copied Image Tally and in the Property Window click on the OID Browse button 4 The existing OID from the first Image tally will be present Navigate to Fan Fault 2 and click OK In this example the associated OID is 1 1 22 3 2 4 2 1 Compare this to the OID of the first image tally 1 1 22 3 2 4 1 1 and it is apparent that in this case just the penultimate number has changed from 1 to 2 It can therefore be determined that for Fan 3 the fault OID be 1 1 22 3 2 4 3 1 5 To create further Fan Fault Image Tallies simply copy and paste an Image Tally and Label edit the text of the label and edit the OID of the Image Tally The PSU Image Tallies in this example were created in exactly the same way but with a starting OID of 1 1 22 3 2 2 1 1 for PSU 1 and then again changing the penultimate number for subsequent PSU faults Issue 1 Rev
135. age 94 Example to set Destination 5 to follow Destination 1 1 Open Configuration Mode 2 Select a controller and click Edit Controller Config 3 Select the Generic tab and click Edit Controller The Generic Configuration Editor displays 4 Navigate to FollowDestinations see Fig 158 5 RouterController J Matrices Le Matrices 1 4J Levels Gei Levels 1 Aa Sources E La Dests Gei Dests 1 Lei Names 3 FollowDestinations z Lei FollowDestinations 1 Le Matrix 1 Gei Level 1 iw Destination 5 AlternativeName Ge AudioModifyDefault DestAudioNormal Le UseLastRunViewChanges False Le DefaultAlternativeName Gei Dests 2 Lei Dests 3 z G Dests 4 Fig 158 Destination Follow 5 To add an element to the array click Add Branch 6 Set the Destination to 5 7 Click Push Branch to Controller Page 159 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 9 Configure a MultiViewer The MultiViewer driver supports the following MultiViewer property based control and monitoring features e Setting captions UMDs either in Run mode or upon a configuration push to the controller e Setting a layout either in Run mode or upon a configuration push to the controller e Receiving alarms in real time in Run mode To add a MultiViewer to a controller 1 Select the controller from the Configuration screen and click the Edit Cont
136. ames can be imported in from or exported to a csv file using the Import and Export buttons This allows names to be easily edited offline and brought back in as a whole Tip Export a default spreadsheet to give a basic structure into which to add new names Configurations may be also copied to and from Excel database configuration forms the names must match To select a range of cells from the Source Associations and Destination Associations tables select the first cell in the range hold down the Shift Key and then click on the last cell in the range Tag Names Tag Names enable names to be changed while the system is in run mode e Pull the configuration from the controller to view any changes to the tag names e Push the configuration to the controller to update the tag names on it Tag names use the 16 character format if selected on screens Associations e Click Associations The Associations Editor window displays Associations are used with control panels as a means of switching more than one level of routing on a single button press For example VTR signal levels can be grouped into a single association e Level 1 video e Level 2 audio Source Associations refer to the group of sources and Destination Associations refer to a group of signals at a destination The Association Source and Destination names can be changed through the Names Editor see section 5 5 5 4 Fa Names Editor ca e Sources
137. an editor is dragged to a new position without docking it stays as a floating window To move an editor window or tab into a new position 1 Click and drag the editor The selected window shows as a colored rectangle and several position markers show the possible docking positions 2 Drag the window over the position markers A colored rectangle indicates the destination position of each marker Release the editor to dock it in the required position Each window as well as the main screen area displays a set of position markers if the selected window is dragged over it So a window may be docked within the main screen area within the area of or directly over an existing editor window Docking an editor window directly over an existing window causes the two windows to be tabbed allowing selection of either of them Fig 31 shows how to move an editor to a new docked position gr GAIA Segen Anthinectute v i O Properti tulo Deve Type Lee ei Drgeerg e Gate cl Fig 31 Docking Windows Editors can be pinned to the edge of the screen so that they become tabbed windows e To pin an editor or tab to the right hand edge of the window click the It button e To restore the editor click the 43 button Page 33 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com General Operation Title b Juoda zue mp aas Fig 32 Pin Windows 3 1 2 2 Closing an Editor e To close an editor
138. ardware on the controller card SetCrosspoint Routes the source to a destination SetAssoc Routes the source or destination by association SetMonitorRow Routes to a built in monitoring destination SetSalvo Recalls a router salvo SetProtect Protects a destination ClearProtect Unprotects a destination SalvoSnapshot Saves the current crosspoint to a specific salvo Table 35 Router Functions Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 133 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Rules 7 7 Logic The Logic window shows the Rule as a text string Add Inputs and Operators to the Rule in the Logic Diagram Editor and the Logic string automatically changes to match Edit the logic string by typing values and operators and the changes are reflected in the Logic Diagram Editor To edit the logic text string type a value or operator directly into the text string The background of the Logic window changes to a pale yellow color to indicate that there is a difference between the Logic string and the Logic Diagram To update the Logic Diagram click the se button If the Logic string is invalid the background of the Logic window changes to a red color and a description of the error is shown at the bottom of the window 7 7 1 Operator Syntax Table 36 lists the syntax for all the operators Operator Syntax Lookup Lookup Controller IP Address Port Number Input Name Lo kupA 127 0 0 1 1000 0 Tout Changed valuechanged Input Name val
139. ase Connect and get databases SQL Access Ca File Access Ca Target Database v type in a name above for a new database Operation Backup Mode 0 Restore Mode SQL Backup Path to Backup File C VM Centra SQLTOOL BAK Fig 207 SQLDBTool Screen 1 Select the server name from the drop down list at the top of the screen 2 Click Connect and Get Databases F 2 1 Restore a Database Before restoring a database ensure that the current database has been backed up first 1 Ensure the Restore Mode radio button is selected 2 Click Retrieve file names from backup 3 Click Restore Database When prompted to Overwrite existing database click Yes 4 When the restore is complete a dialog box displays Click OK F 2 2 Backup a Database 1 Ensure the Backup Mode radio button is selected 2 Browse to the path of where the backup files for the database are to be saved 3 Click Backup Database Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 245 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Databases F 3 Aurora Nebula Importer This section describes how to import Aurora or Nebula configuration files from a legacy database into the current Workbench database To open Aurora Nebula Importer from the Windows Start menu browse to Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Aurora Database Importer G Aurora Nebula Importer DAR This utility allows you to import configuration from a legacy database into an MCM database
140. assword admin admin user none required Table 3 Default Users If no keyboard is attached click on the keyboard button to display an on screen keyboard 1 Type a user name 2 Type a password if required 3 Click Login or press the Return key The home screen displays see Fig 27 Configuration Administration Rules Architecture Fig 27 Initial Workbench Administration Screen See General Operation on page 32 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 29 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 7 LiveRunner LiveRunner is an optional component of the Workbench installation LiveRunner is the live control and monitoring run mode client allowing a screen to be run without running Workbench LiveRunner is available from the Windows Start Menu Start All Programs Snell MCM LiveRunner The user Login Window displays see Fig 28 LoginWindow Username Password Login ea Fig 28 LiveRunner Login 1 Type a user name 2 Type a password if required 3 Click Login or press the Return key An Initial Screen must be assigned to each user otherwise an error message displays when logging into LiveRunner This error also displays if trying to enter Run mode 2 7 1 Command Line Parameters Command line parameters can be added to the shortcut from LiveRunner The options are username or user or u followed by a Workbench user name password or pass or
141. ate button The number of associations can also be configured manually Note For a single level system the number of associations should match the level size Table 11 Router Database Configuration Tabs Names The Names Editor is used to add edit the names of the Sources Destinations and Salvos The names can be 4 8 12 16 or 32 characters long Names within each character length tab should be unique All name types can be used with Workbench soft panels The character length used is set by the device connected to the controller For example 4 character names for 6236 6237 panels and Tx product 8 character names for 6276 6277 panels and Under Monitor Displays 12 character names for 677x panels 16 character names for UMD devices 32 character names for RollCall hardware panels Tag names See Tag Names on page 55 Only enter names in the character lengths that will be used to avoid needlessly filling the database Names entered that are too long for the currently selected character length are automatically truncated Page 53 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration e Click Names The Names Editor window displays B Ta Names Editor o eE Sources Destinations Source Associations Destination Associations Salvos 8 Character Names for S850V Sources Filter Clear Video AudioM1 m01s0001 m01s0001 m01s0002 m01s0002 m01s0003 m01s0003 m01s0004 m0
142. atically set up The only Module ID available is TGeneralModulelD There are a few rules that should be adhered to when entering logical sources and destinations e The number of physical sources destinations entered should be based on the signal type selected Video and Audio Mono 1 Audio Stereo 2 Audio Dolby E 6 Additional sources destinations are ignored e Physical sources destinations should be unique Entering the same physical source destination for more then one logical source destination could result in incorrect tally information e The physical source destination relates to the input and output ports Therefore the physical source destination number specified must be in range of the input output ports e It is not possible to use the logical to physical mappings to configure destinations to follow other destinations because additional source destinations are ignored However one destination can be set to follow another with the Generic Editor Destination Follow Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 70 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Logical Sources e To specify the logical sources click Edit Logical Sources In instances where a signal that comprises more than one physical source such as the left and right channels of a stereo pair logical sources are used to identify that they should be routed together Logical sources can be made up of between o
143. ation Click Finish Make sure that Workbench is NOT open Open SQL server management express and connect to the server Expand the Databases folder Right click on the Workbench database and select Tasks Restore Database In the Source for restore section select From device and click the browse button The Specify Backup dialog box displays click Add Locate the bak file select it and then click OK In the Specify Backup dialog box click OK Select the file from the Select the backup sets to restore section of the Restore Database dialog box Inthe Select a page section click Options Select Overwrite the existing database and Leave the database ready to use RESTORE WITH RECOVERY Edit the paths and filenames from the default accordingly if required Click OK and close SQL server management express The first time that Workbench is started update the database Page 27 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 5 Start Workbench When the Install Helper shows that all the required components have installed correctly start Workbench To start the Workbench do one of the following e Double click the Workbench icon on the desktop e Start the program from the Windows Start menu The path to Workbench in the Start menu is Start All Programs Snell MCM Workbench The first time that Workbench is started the database needs to be updated Fig 24 shows the initial screen
144. ation associations assigned to the TAKE buttons on a 6277 multi destination panel Pressing and holding down the DEST IDENT button changes the STATUS to show the 8 character name for the assigned destination association for the current set of destination associations This button is especially useful when an ALT DEST button has been assigned Level Buttons Many panel types have level buttons in their configuration These allow breakaway route selections to be made that is routes that are made by selecting parts of an association Each button operates in a toggle on off manner with the level button active indicated by an illuminated button or associated LED lamp The levels that each button controls are individually configurable Page 223 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 D 2 8 D 2 9 D 2 10 D 2 11 D 2 12 D 2 13 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference Alt lev The Alternate level shift function is used on panels where there are more levels than level buttons allowing individual control of all levels lt operates in a toggle on off manner with an LED lamp used to indicate the level shift when the LED lamp is off then the non shifted levels are controllable and when the LED lamp is on the shifted levels are controllable The level shift function is button programmable on all panel types BPX and X Y Any source or destination button can be configured as a level shift button Clear This ke
145. ation with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 6759 and 18x18 X Y 18 sources to 18 destinations with 4 level buttons 6028100 protect and panel lock 36BPX 36 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect Table 56 Supported 1U Panel Types and panel lock Page 220 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference Mode 16x16 X Y BPX Panel 6028000 and 7028000 16x4 X Y BPX 24x12 X Y BPX 24x24 X Y BPX 32x16 X Y BPX 32x4 X Y BPX 48 way BPX 48x4 X Y BPX 72 way BPX Dual 16 split BPX Dual 16 16 BPX Dual 24 split BPX Dual 8 split BPX 6028100 and 7028100 16x16 X Y BPX 6028201 and 7028201 16 way BPX 32 way BPX 8x8 X Y BPX Description 16 sources to 16 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 32 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 16 sources to 4 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 20 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 24 sources to 12 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 36 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 24 sources to 24 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 48 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 32 sources to 16 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 48 sources to 1 destination with 4 l
146. atrix Select an output from the list of destinations A 16 Set Controller Dual Redundancy Over IP To enable remote changeover of dual controllers over IP the IP port configuration must be configured This is relevant for Centra Controllers only 2450 controllers are set up using the configuration files oS PE gt SS P From the Configuration screen edit the primary controller and select Router Configuration Click on the Port configuration button Add a new port and configure it as an IP port using the SW P 02 protocol Set the Controller type to Centra Controller Set Single Dual mode to Dual Define the primary and secondary IP addresses Fig 179 Port Configuration Example Ta Port Configuration Serial IP Port Configuration Matrix Ports Available Ports 127 0 0 12 2007 Configured Ports LocalControl Controller remote COM7 Interrogate Port New Serial Port New IP Port Port Settings Name Controller remote IP Port Properties Serial 1P Ip Controller Type Centra Controller 2330 246x PC Protocol General Switcher In SWP02 Single Dual Dual Primary Secondary IP Address 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 2 IP Port 2008 2008 OK canca Caper Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 178 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples Click on the Matrix Ports tab Select the Video level and click on
147. ave been added The individual alarms must be setup using the Generic Editor under the Devices branch See Generic Editor on page 94 5 7 4 FieldStore Device A FieldStore Device makes it possible to define DCCP database fields Typically to pass values between soft panels see section A 5 e To open the Fieldstore Editor click the Edit Fieldstore button The Fieldstore Editor screen displays Go Fieldstore Editor o lua UDFOO1 UDFO02 UDF003 UDFO04 B3 HD Bypass follow enable B4 HD Bypass follow enable Export to CSV Import from CSV Fig 77 FieldStore Editor Screen To add a field 1 Click the Add New Field button A new field is added to the list 2 Type a Name 3 If required select whether the FieldStore should persist this determines whether the value is remembered if the controller is restarted and it powers up in the same state FieldStore names settings and values may be exported and imported to and from a CSV file Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 89 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Issue 1 Rev 4 5 7 5 GPI Device 5 7 6 These settings configure the number of General Purpose Interfaces in the system On a 2330 controller this can be up to 16 GPls By using the maximum of 3 additional expansion cards up to 160 GPls are available 48 per expansion card Select GPlDevice and click the Edit GPIs button The GPls Editor
148. ave the audio crosspoint control the number of signals associated with each is required An extra Port Configuration in the router configuration must be added for each level See Port Configuration on page 56 e Click Configure Audio Mapping to open the Audio Mapping Configuration window Setup the audio mapping through the tabs The audio configuration should be performed within the video matrix A filter is available in a number of the tabs to quickly find sources and destinations e Enter alphanumeric characters into the search bar for example VTR or Edit 1 and click on the Filter button The display changes to show only the items containing the filter text in the source or destination name e Click on the Clear button to remove a filter A Filter Clear Fig 66 Filter Source Sizes Each incoming video stream is capable of carrying up to 32 embedded audio channels However it is unlikely that each source will need that capability So to optimize the system source sizes should only be set for the system cards carrying embedded or discrete audio Input sources are likely to be in groups of 24 the number of AES inputs per card Multiple channels on source m02s0001 _ wo Mult Source Audio Only A ee i Audio Only Discrete audio ARRAY Audio size number of channels Audio Address ID setup Fig 67 Source Size Audio source sizes can be set individually or mult
149. bench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 2 Nucleus 2450 Controller B 2 1 Table 46 A Nucleus 2450 controller maps the physical inputs and outputs of the router to the software inputs Sources and outputs destinations To access the Configuration screen log in as a user with Configuration permissions see section 4 3 A Nucleus 2450 controller must be set as a Nucleus Controller 2450 which is a Router controller with the ability to connect to Panel devices See Configuring Controllers on page 48 Features Table 46 lists the main features of the Nucleus 2450 Controller Feature Mapping Source Destination numbering and expansion Number of controllable levels Expansion Slaving Level sizes Audio capability Explanation Logical to physical source and destination mapping Source and destinations addressed by external controllers can be mapped to different physical sources and destinations on the frame Non contiguous source and destination numbering on one level The mapping capabilities of Workbench makes expansion possible without moving existing modules Unlimited Commands received via SW P 02 can control all levels on a multi level system if levels are slaved using the RJ45 expansion link for example Pyxis to Pyxis Commands received via SW P 02 cannot control any router slaved using any serial protocol for example SW P 02 SW P 08 out for exampl
150. card and plugging it directly into a PC Update Through FTP Open a FTP connection to the controller 1 2 Open a terminal connection to the Controller the TCP port is 50000 At the command prompt type login User 2450 Password xyz Type the command Programdiskimage pbl2450controller Wait for the message The new boot image was installed successfully To reboot the controller type Reboot Alternatively click the Force Reset of Controller button Update Through Pbak To update the software through the Pbak utility 1 3 4 Open Pbak Deploy Tool From the Windows Start menu browse to Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Pbak Deploy Tool Make a backup copy of the existing PA864 rtf file either on the PC or in a folder on the CompactFlash card If anything goes wrong as a result of this update restore the original FPGA firmware by putting the backup copy into the root folder of the CompactFlash Copy the new file PA864 rtf onto the CompactFlash card Force Reset of Controller The archive zip file has a firmware revision letter after the PA864 title but the rtf file used does not have a revision letter This is because the Nucleus software always looks for the file with the fixed name PA864 rtf on the CompactFlash card The version letter can be found under Version branch in the Generic Editor See Generic Editor on page 94 B 2 3 Nucleus 2450 LEDs Fig 191 Nucleus
151. ccommodate all the Mapped Programs required 3 Click on the drop down box on a channel and select the Mapped Program to add to that channel and the number of channels below depending on the audio standard of the mapped program selected 4 Add a further description title if required 5 Repeat for as many Mapped Programs as required for the set When setting a Program Set ensure that each channel is given a unique order number otherwise the error icon IS displays and the channels will not map correctly Source Assignment To assign a Program Set to an input e Click on the drop down menu for an input and select a Program Set Repeat for other inputs as required If a size has not been attributed to a source or the source is video only then it is not possible to assign a Program Set to that source Destination Assignment To assign a Program Set to an output e Click on the drop down menu for an output and select a Program Set Repeat for other outputs as required If a size has not been attributed to a destination or the destination is video only then it is not possible to assign a Program Set to that destination Advanced Configuration Input Ports If the auto configure option is used the number and type of ports are set automatically Any input ports that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownInput To manually configure physical input ports before going online 1 Inthe Number of P
152. cessary change the Caption to Screen 2 and clear the Show Screen Name checkbox Copy the new button and save the screen 4 5 Open the Panel without a Take Button 6 Edit the panel and paste the new buiton 7 Set the Behavior Specific to Screen 1 the panel without a take button If necessary change the Caption to Screen 1 and clear the Show Screen Name checkbox 8 Save the screen 9 Test the Screens by selecting Run from the main menu It can take several seconds for the panel to communicate with the controller 10 On either panel route the signals as required When switching between panels both panels show the same settings Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 147 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 2 BPX Soft Panel A BPX panel is a one button per crosspoint style of panel The operator pushes one of the buttons and a source to destination route is made Fig 142 shows the finished four by four panel The panel allows a monitor to view any of the four sources The active route is shown in green and the inactive in red Screen 3 Screen 2 Fig 142 BPX Panel Prerequisites A device controller or simulator must be attached for the following procedure to work correctly A 2 1 Create New Screen 1 Open the Workbench Design window By default the first time the Design window is opened the first screen in the list is shown Subsequently the design view displays with t
153. click the button e To restore an editor click the button and select the editor to restore The editor displays back in the position from where it was deleted If other editors have been moved since deleting an editor the restored editor displays as close to the previous position as possible 3 2 Run Screen When all the configuration design of panels and actions are defined the Run screen is used to control the associated hardware via the interactive screen that has been created e Click 3 to open the Run screen The Run Screen has no menus It can only be used as defined and then closed when not in use e To close the Run screen click the button or press F4 This does not close Workbench 3 3 Change User e To log in as a different user click the Logout button e The login screen displays see Fig 33 Fig 33 Login Screen 1 Type a user name 2 Type a password if required 3 Click Login or press the Return key The home screen displays Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 34 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com General Operation e To show the log file click the Log button The log file showing all online events since the start of the current session displays in a Windows Notepad window E 2rkenchtrrorszeseon log File Edit Format View Help 03 01 2012 02 139 DEBUG 6744 LogTools lei path is C Program Files x86 snell a 03 01 2012 02 213 INFO 67
154. ct or add a grid of 4x3 buttons 2 Set the group behavior to Router Dial Up or Generic Dial Up and the button properties to Dial Up Save the screen before applying a key assignment as there is no undo available for Auto Edit 3 With the buttons selected right click and select Auto Edit 4 From the Helpers tab select Dial up and the appropriate layout and click OK Each button has its Lower Text behavior changed to the appropriate keypad number see Fig 112 Ta Auto Edit LL ks Helpers Properties Generic Helper Selection Helper Dial up Keypad Helper Please select a keypad layout 7 8 9 1 2 3 also aisle rary 3 7 8 9 LO o o E OK Cancel Fig 112 Automatic Keypad Dial up 6 12 2 Automatic Key Assignment Select a group of buttons and Workbench automatically assigns the correct source destination or BPX to each button To auto assign sources destinations or BPX 1 Open a screen created through the Add Panel wizard 2 On the toolbar click the 4 button Save the screen before applying a key assignment as there is no undo available for Auto Edit 3 Select the buttons to assign 4 From the Properties Window change the button s behavior to Source or Destination or BPX according to the Group behavior and properties required 5 With the buttons selected right click and from the Helpers t
155. customize user interfaces for router control modular product monitoring and control and offers highly flexible alarm and status reporting options The system is flexible and scalable providing a range of interfaces from a single router control panel running on a PC through to large and powerful installations using dual redundant control across many sites By downloading all relevant data from the database on power up clients PCs and device drivers can operate independently if connection to the database is lost Workbench operates in a client server configuration using standard TCP IP network protocols that makes it easy to integrate into existing network infrastructures Snell and third party protocols are also used when interconnecting different equipment types If required device drivers can use an embedded controller with dual redundant power and run a real time operating system This combination offers the ultimate in resilient design Individual logins provide access to specific screens defined by the users login or role meaning each operator or job function can have dedicated screens for the task in hand Workbench is a powerful design tool to design screens for any style of user interface Every aspect of the user interface can be customized so that screens can range from clear and functional to more radical designs for the artistically creative Database Configuration Choose which installation suits your requirements Fig
156. d select Convert to 246x This runs a wizard configuring the 246x controller and updating any screens connected to that controller In the case of dual controllers the conversion need only be performed on the Primary controller as the wizard will convert both Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 104 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration 5 9 10 Upgrading When Workbench is upgraded it is recommended that PC controllers also be upgraded 5 9 10 1 PC based Controllers 1 2 Copy the CentraController exe file and overwrite the existing controllers Delete the CentraController dccp_config files that are in the controller s folders the config files are unlikely to work across versions and may even crash the controllers Restart the controllers Push their configurations see section 5 9 2 Page 105 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 Design Mode 6 1 Description Design mode allows the creation of new soft panels and editing of hardware and soft panels To open design mode log in as a user with Design permissions see section 4 3 Centra gt Weikberch user E mo olle ts 8 11008 It FET la Lal bell J Tote GA b Drac ka Prapaerty WE Sereeni Pane lem Fig 95 Design Mode By default the first time the Design window opens the first screen in the Screens Edi
157. ditor we e Actions e Toolbox e Inputs e Logic Table 33 Toolbar Buttons Toolbox Fig 119 lists the logical actions in the Design View toolbox a Ga Le Ae li LF da Fig 119 Toolbox To place an action click on the required action and position it in the Logic Diagram Editor Inputs are automatically placed at the left of the window Actions are automatically placed in the centre of the window and the Output is always placed at the right of the window Inputs The inputs colored purple are e Connected e Now e DCCP The Inputs window lists the currently active inputs Connected This checks to see whether the selected controller is connected and returns a boolean TRUE or FALSE To add a Connected input either select it from the toolbox or click the e button Now Uses the current date or time system time as the input to a Rule To add a Now input either select it from the toolbox or click the button Page 129 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Rules A Now input does not cause an event to fire so it must be used in conjunction with a DCCP input see 7 4 1 3 A now input must be followed by one of three operators Equal To Less Than or Greater Than For example an operation equivalent to Now Time gt 12 00 00 returns TRUE if the current time is after noon and FALSE any time before that When writing the string into an operator for comparison purposes several
158. e The tab also shows the path to the current database and licensing details 4 7 1 Screen Management To backup screens 1 Click Backup Screens 2 Browse to the folder into which the backup files are to be saved and then click OK To restore screens 1 Click Restore Screens 2 Awarning screen displays stating that all existing objects will be deleted All changes that have been made since the backup file was created will be lost 3 If this is acceptable click OK If not click No It is possible to export individual screens from the Design screen Individual Controllers from Configuration or the entire database using SQL Management Studio For information about performing database backup and restoration from SQL Management Studio refer to the SQL Management Studio online help 4 7 2 Database Repair These functions are used to clean the database and purge unused items Important The following functions change the database and cannot be undone Ensure the database has been backed up before using these functions To remove unassigned widgets and behaviors with no association 1 Click on the Remove Orphaned Objects button 2 Awarning screen displays 3 If this is acceptable click OK If not click No 4 When complete a summary screen displays indicating the number of changes made To fix widgets that have an invalid behavior for example add a passive behavior to widgets with a null behavior 1 Click
159. e D15 LED remains on it could indicate a fault in the interface to the modules On a dual processor system the D15 LED can indicate a mismatch between the databases on the two controllers e Red FPGA interface validation error e Off DO error Active Standby e Flashes Green Active e Red Standby Table 47 Nucleus 2450 Controller LEDs Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 193 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 2 4 Network Initialization File Each controller has its own configuration file that defines the network connections The Network ini file can be edited using a text editor for setting the IP address for example The following fields are required in the Network ini file NETWORK Force10M 1 IPAddress nnn nnn nnn nnn SubNetMask nnn nnn nnn nnn DefaultGateway nnn nnn nnn ann DNSAddress nnn nnn nnn nnn UseDHCP 1 UseSNMP 1 SNMP Version Version Description Text Contact Unknown Location Unknown SysName 2450 The Force10M flag specifies whether the network speed of the controller is limited to 10Mbits per second or 100Mbits per second If this value is set to 1 then the network speed is limited to 10Mbits per second If it is set to O the network connection can operate up to 100Mbits per second If this value is omitted from the ini file the connection defaults to 10Mbits per second For Cygnus routers this must be set
160. e a Freeway slaved from a Pyxis This applies to routing and audio modifiers Commands received via SW P 08 and GVG ES in can control all frames and levels of a multi level system This applies whether they are slaved using the RJ45 expansion Pyxis to Pyxis or SW P 02 out on RS422 for example Pyxis to Freeway This includes audio modify commands Cygnus does not have an RJ45 expansion output so slaving from Cygnus is not possible There is currently a limit for the physical port mapping of a total of 1152 input ports and 1432 output ports with the router expansion bus The first level is mapped as 576x576 even on a 17x17 Pyxis each subsequent level occupies an additional 544 input ports and 544 output ports This results in a current maximum of 3 levels depending on level size Expansion with serial ports does not have this limitation Router levels can be configured to any size when slaved via SW P 02 or SW P 08 out Embedded audio is routed along with video No separate audio routing is available Nucleus 2450 Controller Features Page 191 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 2 2 Nucleus 2450 Firmware The Nucleus 2450 firmware runs on an FPGA within the controller This is loaded every time the controller is booted and consists of the file PA864 rtf on the CompactFlash There are two methods to update the firmware FTP access to the controller Removing the CompactFlash
161. e see Fig 152 Page 155 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples G Choose Decp Field El pe LoggingController Gei Version E As Devices E eE Devices 1 FieldStoreDevice D As Fields Go Fields 1 Gi Mame Lar Timestamp Gei StringValue ot DoubleValue Le UseLastRunViewChanges Fig 152 Radio Button Property Selection 6 Click the Lookup Values button The Lookup Values dialog box displays see Fig 153 Fa Lookup Values Name Value named valued Fig 153 Radio Button Lookup Values 7 Click Add for each option 8 For each option type a Name and the required DCCP Value 9 Click OK 10 Save and run the example As the slider is moved the label displays the current value The radio buttons are not visible until runtime To show that the Radio Button control works at run time add a Label that displays the Radio Button s value 11 Add a Label control and assign it to the same group as the Radio Button 12 Set the behavior to DCCP 13 Copy the OID value from the Radio Button and paste it into the label behavior specific OID 14 Save and run the example As the Radio Buttons are selected the label displays the current value see Fig 154 2 Test Value 1 O Test Value 3 Fig 154 Radio Button Example Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 156 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 7 Monitor Buttons Button
162. e Visual C installation SQL server 1 Displays information about the SQL server such as installed yes no version number and type of installation SQL Serverl Management Displays information about the SQL Server Management Studio Studio Workbench Database Displays information about the Workbench Database and allows connection changes Table 2 Workbench Components 111 Not required for distributed systems Until connecting to a Workbench Database this particular component displays red as required but not installed See Fig 17 Support If problems occur with the installation at any time contact customer support customersupport snellgroup com e Click Copy to Clipboard and paste the current screen information into the email Computer Displays information about the PC on which the Workbench is installed STS 1 Centra Configuration Helper Di e e Version Windows 7 Service Pack SP1 Architecture X64 Computer Name LT DNH MR 03557 User StuartCheer System Dir C Windows system32 Program Files C Program Files x86 32bit Program Files C Program Files x86 Temp Dir C Users StuartCheer AppData Local Temp Resolution 1920 x 1080 Slow Machine False Remote Session False Send to Clipboard Fig 17 Installed Computer Component If this component installs but displays orange check that the PC conforms to the system requirements at the beginning of this guide See Syst
163. e advantage that many of the parameters are configured for the controller see section 5 6 1 e Import an existing screen and configure it as required see section 6 4 3 e Screens can be grouped together in folders Right click on the Screens Folder and click on the New Folder from the menu Click on the folder name to rename it Page 108 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 4 1 Create a New Blank Screen To create a new blank screen 1 2 A A m oS At the bottom right of the window select the Screens Editor tab see section 6 4 2 Either on the Screens Editor tab click the Add button or on the toolbar click the Lo button The New Screen wizard displays Type a name for the new screen From the drop down list select the type of screen to create e Blank build up a screen with as many panels as required for any number of different tasks are necessary e Basic Routing a video XY routing panel template that can be edited as required e Audio Track Routing an audio XY routing panel template that can be edited as required If a Blank screen is selected click Finish The screen displays and is ready for editing If a Video or Audio screen is selected click Next Select a screen size and select a color theme from the drop down lists Click Next Select a controller and matrix from the drop down lists Click Finish The screen displays and can be edited
164. e cached checksum is returned to Workbench for it to generate the checksum indication The controller then loads any values that are stored in the persistence file into RAM Any changes based on this persistence data are not reflected in the checksum Persisted controller configuration parameters may be edited on the controller using the Generic Online Editor Such edits are stored in the persistence file and replicated to the second controller These edits will NOT result in a checksum mismatch To integrate these edits into the Workbench copy of the configuration e Perform a Pull config from controller operation to load persistence data into the Workbench copy of the configuration and then perform a Push operation to the controller to make the checksums match See Push and Pull Configuration on page 97 5 9 Controller Management 5 9 1 Edit Controller IP Address or Name The controller settings dialog box displays the Type Name IP Address and the Port for the controller see Fig 85 ea Controller Settings fo Type Controller2450 Name Test 2450 Controller IP Address 127 0 0 34 conc Fig 85 Controller Settings The controller type cannot be changed To change the basic settings of an existing controller 1 In the Configuration window select the controller and click the Edit IP Address or Name button The Controller Settings dialog box displays 2 Make the required changes to the
165. e controllers identical select the controller to copy the configuration from and click the Copy config to partner button PyxisAnalogueAudio144x144A 172 31 9 111 3000 Controller2450 ES Primary CN De PyxisAnalogueAudio144x144B 172 31 9 117 2000 Controller2450 ES Primary y 5 PyxisAnalogueAudio144x144A 172 31 9 111 3000 Controller2450 Primary De PyxisAnalogueAudio144x144B 172 31 9 117 2000 Controller2450 Fig 86 Dual Redundancy To pair two controllers 1 Select two controllers of the same type 2 Click the Pair Controllers button The first controller shows that it is the Primary controller Workbench indicates that there is a difference between partners The Primary controller is the one that the hardware and software panels make reference to in Design mode It does not refer to the physical hardware or which controller is in operation To unpair two controllers 1 Select the two paired controllers 2 Click the Unpair Controllers button The two controllers split to become individual controllers Page 98 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 5 9 5 1 5 9 5 2 Important 5 9 5 3 9 9 6 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Copy Config to Partner This copies the configuration from the selected controller to the paired controller the status shows that both controllers are synchronised This is particularly useful when installing a replacement controller card for example
166. e ea a 131 Taio CONMCCHONS ou EE LoDo e hee Lode hoes E 132 A vx aie AER hee NM ded Achy hb Ace IE 132 EE EE bee eee cade eet eens bee Pee EE EC bee 133 TOA E Ener e EE 133 FA en 134 Lala Operator SVMs ck duh basa keds abe eee DA e Se Rae ica awe 134 TiO RUGS GOVIG NEE 135 7 8 1 Rules StatuS aa a a A a cara ond cade oO ww ees 135 8 System Architecture 136 Oil DSSCHOUCH ies ee ae ot Be ca LES he ECR e RES OER GMS Oo be ee Be 136 G2 TOODA e e Ge bad ee nee hee Bena be eee eee eens 136 SO Mei EEN 137 8 4 Device RIES aa toni e job eGo wah Oo OA Ew Ede ww Och eg 137 8 4 1 Import Export Device Ivpes 1 0 0c eee 138 OO D o eh book woe oh ae i ee beck A ee 139 8 5 1 Add a Device to a Drawing 2 0 cc ene 139 8 5 2 Device PropertieS 1 20 eee eens 140 AN lte EE 140 8 6 1 Names and Connections aaaea eee 140 00 2 WIGDIAY aa ines shew EE eR Beha hae BE ee eee 140 AS 141 Oil CAS dare dus pura ear eb ae epa A 142 Sale Gable Ce dl e WEE 142 Appendix A Worked Examples 143 Page 5 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com PAY OOU FF E EE 143 A 1 1 Create New Panel 0 0 0 0 ee eee eens 143 A 1 2 Clone Panel Without a Take Button 146 A 1 3 Link Panels Together 147 Pel Br al AA a a ena E E a E a E 148 A 2 1 Create New Screen nannaa teens 148 A 2 2 Modify Screen Properties 148 A 2 3 Modify Panel Properties 149 A 2 4 Modify Group Behavior
167. e list Configure the engine as required 5 8 Controller Configuration Editors The Generic tab has three buttons e Edit Controller See Generic Editor on page 94 e Edit Controller Online See Online Editor on page 95 e Checksum See Checksum on page 95 Ge Controller Configuration 5850 Single Devices Routers Hardware Config Gerenc Tree Style ter Edit Controller Ortene Fig 82 Generic Controller Configuration da Controller Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 93 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 9 8 1 Important Important Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Generic Editor The Generic Configuration Editor is used to edit a controller in a logical tree structure format see Fig 83 It can edit or view any controller but must be used to edit those that do not have a specific GUI such as RollCall controllers Multiviewers etc Fa Generic Configuration Editor SnellController_1 4 amp Controller 127 0 0 1 2012 Lei Generallnfo pe DCCP Array Comms 3 O e Lei Version se 4 43 Devices 1 2 Push Branch To Controller 4 Devices 1 RouterDevice A Generallnfo lt ba Matrices a Lei Matrices 1 La Levels dai SourceAssocs DCCP Choice CommsPors AA nos DestAssocs a A TADA s Mas T PE 1 2 1 1 Push Branch To Controller WS PortNo 0 a 2 AutoSyncNamesWithDevice False Lei Matrices 2 da Comms ba Salvos d
168. e physical source destination number specified must be in range of the input output ports e It is not possible to use the logical to physical mappings to configure destinations to follow other destinations because additional source destinations are ignored However one destination can be set to follow another with the Generic Editor Destination Follow See Generic Editor on page 94 Logical Sources e To specify the logical sources click Edit Logical Sources In instances where a signal that comprises more than one physical source such as the left and right channels of a stereo pair logical sources are used to identify that they should be routed together Logical sources can be made up of between one and six physical input sources If the auto configure option is used the logical sources are automatically set up To manually configure logical sources 1 Inthe Number of Sources type the required number of logical sources and then click Apply The specified number of logical sources are added to the table For each logical source select the signal type from the drop down list and then type the physical sources that are comprised by the logical source in the Phy 1 to Phy 6 fields Continue adding the logical sources in this manner until complete or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 2 Click Apply or OK Logical Destinations e Click Edit Logical Destinations to specify the logical destinations
169. e shown 2 Select a Matrix and Level from the drop down list A 2 5 Add Buttons 1 From the toolbar set the Create Grid button to Rows 4 and Columns 4 and click the Grid button The background color of the grid button changes to blue indicating that it is selected Fig 143 Grid Button 2 From the Toolbox at the bottom of the screen click the Button control Drag the cursor and place the buttons on the panel If the Create Grid button is not toggled on then only a single button is added cat Bm lw aroup i 55 E ES on a an an Button Fig 144 Add Buttons Page 149 2013 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 2 6 Move Buttons To move the buttons Either move them individually or hold the Ctrl key down and drag the cursor around the buttons to multiple select them Drag the buttons to the required positions or enter values in the property window Select all the buttons and change their Behavior to BPX The color of the button changes to red A 2 7 Assign a Source and Destination to Each Button Select the top row of buttons and select a source association Repeat the process for the other three rows selecting a different source for each row Select the first column of buttons and select a destination association Repeat the process for the other three columns selecting a different destination for each row Alterna
170. e source for all inputs Pyxis Video 72x72 Ref1 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 72x72 Video Video signal format and actual router size is dependent on cards and rear connectors fitted to Pyxis frame Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs Page 208 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Routers Reference C 1 2 7 Pyxis Timecode 128x128 Ref1 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 128x128 Time Code Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs C 1 2 8 Pyxis RS422 128x128 A Her Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level
171. eater Than or Less Than or placed adjacent to another logical operator e AND All input values must be TRUE e NOT All input values must be FALSE e OR At least one of the input values must be TRUE Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 131 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Rules 7 4 3 Connections A Rule must have a valid connection made between all Inputs Operators and the Output Always make connections from left to right To make a connection between Inputs Operators and the Output 1 Double click on the item to be connected A red connection line extends from the item to the cursor 2 Move the cursor to where a valid connection can be made the line changes green 3 Click to form the connection Make a Connection Valid Connection ae Cua Unselected Connection Selected Connection N Fig 122 Connections Until a valid connection is made the Inputs Operators and the Output are greyed out 7 5 Property Editor The behaviors of Inputs and Operators are set in the Property Editor To view or edit the properties of a control 1 At the bottom right of the window select the Property Editor tab 2 Select a control The Property Editor displays information that is relevant to the selected control see Fig 123 Property Editor zs Ms Controller Connection Input ger Behaviour Controller Nucleus Controlled Device Name Input Fig 123 Properties Editor Iss
172. eature The AutoChangeOverlfNoNetwork feature under the Features node has no effect Refresh This refreshes the list view of the controllers Page 99 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 9 9 7 5 9 7 1 5 9 7 2 Important Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Advanced The Advanced section has three buttons e Connections see section 5 9 7 1 e OID Rewrite Helper see section 5 9 7 2 e Snapshot Editor see section 5 9 7 3 e Delete RollCall Cache Connections This lists the controllers in a pop up window indicating the active connections OID Rewrite Helper Back up the database before changing any OID values see Appendix F Each physical entry in a controller s database has an OID address Object Identifier For example the address value for a specific control such as the router source for a destination The OID Rewrite Helper provides a method to globally change any DCCP reference so that it points to a new OID address see Fig 87 The OID Rewrite Helper does not change the values of the referenced OID address a OID Rewrite Helper Boa Start Controller Start OID End Controller End OID Mate K A P Add another rewrite entry X Delete selected rewrite entry Cancel Fig 87 OID Rewrite Helper To change the OID References 1 For each rewrite entry select the Start Controller from the drop down list 2 Select the Start OID address E
173. ecommended for Run mode and screen design and a minimum of 1280 x 1024 for Workbench general configuration Specification e A PC running MS Windows 7 64 bit Windows 7 32 bit and XP SP3 or higher 32 bit or 64 bit are also Supported e A multi core processor gt 2 1 GHz e 1GB RAM minimum gt 2 GB RAM recommended e Support for DirectX 9 graphics with a WDDM driver 128 MB of graphics memory minimum Pixel Shader 2 0 and 32 bits per pixel For Windows 7 Administration rights are required for installing Workbench System performance is dependent on the PC s available resources The PC should be as clean as possible of other running processes 2 1 1 Minimum Installation Requirements For a distributed installation the minimum installation requirement consists of the mandatory items and the LiveRunner component see Table 1 For a standalone installation the minimum installation consists of the mandatory items and the SQL Server Express component 2 2 Install Workbench During the installation do not close the installation wizard or the Workbench Install Helper Wait until the entire setup process is complete before exiting the install wizard and Workbench Install Helper 1 If upgrading ensure that no Workbench components are running for example LiveRunner 2 Insert the Workbench DVD into the CD ROM drive The installation application starts automatically If it does not browse to the installation CD ROM
174. een from the drop down list If this is the initial set up of users and there are no screens available ignore this step and assign an initial screen later 4 lf the Workbench user name is identical to the windows login select Auto login to log the user in to Workbench without the need to enter a user name If the Auto Login option is selected to change user click the Home button and click Log Out Enter a new username 5 To start Workbench in run mode when logging in select Navigates directly to run mode An Initial Screen must be assigned otherwise an error message displays when Run mode is started 6 To open screens in edit mode in the Design area select Automatically load screens ready for editing 4 2 2 Delete a User To delete a user 1 Select the user from the list of users on the left 2 Click Delete User 3 Inthe confirmation Window click Yes Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 37 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Administration 4 3 Roles 4 3 1 4 3 2 The Roles tab is for the administrator to assign permissions for each user depending on operational needs For example roles can be created for central control room operators or system administrators r y Pro D I SAE Ba E 7 Centra Workbench user lt A a Users Roles Screen Permissions Controller Permissions Locking Data Management Sequence Sets Identity Name Description Role name Ever
175. efore reverting back to showing the current source routed or preset a few seconds later ROUTE Source cannot be routed as route inhibited Displayed in Preset display INH NN No source preselected on the most significant active level but there are sources preselected on the lower levels PFI No source preselected on the most significant active level but there are sources preselected on the upper levels Table 59 Panels with Displays Page 227 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 D 3 D 3 1 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference Message Explanation TTN No source preselected on the most significant active level but there are sources preselected on the higher and lower levels SALVO Displayed in STATUS or IN USE displays to indicate that a salvo has been preselected NO XPT Error message displayed in STATUS or IN USE to indicate that a crosspoint cannot be set as card not present LEV CON Error message displayed in STATUS or IN USE to indicate that a crosspoint was not made on a level because the level was not controllable from that panel DST CON Error message displayed in STATUS or IN USE to indicate that a crosspoint was not made because the X Y panel attempting to set it is not allowed to control the destination Table 59 Panels with Displays The brightness of displays on applicable panels may be changed by reconfiguring the database It is not possible to have different brightn
176. em Requirements on page 14 Page 21 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 4 4 Microsoft Data Access Components Displays information about the Microsoft Data Access components for example version number and installation status PRES Installed Yes Version 6 1 7601 17514 Meets Requirements Yes Send to Clipboard Fig 18 Installed Microsoft Data Access Components This component is required to run the Workbench If the component displays as red the installation was incomplete Restart the installation 2 4 5 Visual C Redistributable Displays information about the Visual C Redistributable component for example version number and installation status Installed Yes Send to Clipboard Fig 19 Installed Visual C Redistributable Component This component is required to run the Workbench If the component displays as red the installation was incomplete Restart the installation Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 22 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 4 6 SQL Server Important The version of SQL Server on the installation DVD is 2008 R2 If an existing SQL Server 2005 is available it is not essential to upgrade However the sample database on the installation DVD is version 2008 R2 and cannot be imported to the 2005 or 2008 version If any version of SQL server is installed the Configuration Helper displays this component as instal
177. er level of the matrix or other matrix The tie line can join video to video or audio to audio It cannot connect video to audio Tie Lines can connect to more than one router controller Up to 40 routers may be added per tie line engine Select TielineDevice and click on the Edit Tielines button The Tie Lines Editor displays Page 90 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration e Fa Tie Lines Editor ca Ea Available Router Controller s Selected Router Controller s Matrix 1 Add Matrix 2 Remove Swap Name Tie Line 1 Auto Y Group 1 Owner Lock Name User Router Matrix Matrix 1 gt Video y Level Video y Dest O P 0001 Router Matrix Matrix 2 gt Video y Level Video y Source 1 P 0001 Name Tie Line 2 Auto Y Group 2 Owner Lock Name User Router Matrix Matrix 1 gt Video y Level Video Dest 0 P 0002 Router Matrix Matrix 2 gt Video y Level Video Source up 0002 Name Tie Line 3 Auto Group 3 Owner Lock Name User Router Matrix Matrix 1 gt Video y Level Video y Deet Op 0003 Router Matrix Matrix 2 gt Video 4 Level Video Source V 0003 Synchronis tie line tally table Export to CSV Import from CSV Add new tie line Remove selected tie lines Ok Cancel Apply
178. ers Reference Issue 1 Rev 4 Polltime 1000 Timeout 50 Return_Status_5 true TCP _Connecteds true Connect_MC_ENA true Stat6_MC_ENA true PyxisVideolnputMonitoring Output 1 7 Firstinput 1 The frequency in milliseconds SC12 polls the router for status Default value is every 1000 milliseconds Increasing this value reduces the load on SC12 and the router by polling it less frequently However it does in crease the time before an error is reported It may be necessary to do this on a heavily loaded SC12 or router Reducing this value reduces the time before an error is reported but increases the load on the SC12 and the router The value should not be set lower than the TIMEOUT value This is the timeout in milliseconds for a response from the router The default is 50 milliseconds This should be sufficient for most routers when single commands are sent in a TCP IP packet If multiple connect messages are sent ina single TCP IP packet the timeout should be increased to 200 milliseconds Also if the router is heavily loaded this value may need to be increased The number of TCP IP connections to the SC12 should not effect the timeout since this is the timeout on the serial port to the router The clients connecting to the SC12 may need to adjust their timeout for the response on the network due to messages on multiple TCP IP connections being serialized to the router This determines whether status request 1 messages retu
179. es that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule To manually set up module configurations 1 Inthe Number of Configurations text field enter the number of module configurations and then click Apply The specified number of configurations is added to the table 2 For each configuration select the type from the drop down list Continue adding the configurations in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click OK Module IDs e Click Edit Module IDs to specify the number and types of module IDs If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module IDs are automatically set up The only Module ID available is TGeneralModulelD There are a few rules that should be adhered to when entering logical sources and destinations e The number of physical sources destinations entered should be based on the signal type selected Video and Audio Mono 1 Audio Stereo 2 Audio Dolby E 6 Additional sources destinations are ignored e Physical sources destinations should be unique Entering the same physical source destination for more then one logical source destination could result in incorrect tally information Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 79 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration e The physical source destination relates to the input and output ports that are defined Therefore th
180. escription Available Ports The available COM ports are displayed on the left of the window Click Interrogate Ports to update the list of available ports Note The list of ports is not automatically updated Manually interrogate the ports to ensure that the list is up to date Add Click Add to transfer the port to the Serial Ports Configured section Assign To change the configured port select a port from the Available column and a Configured port and click Assign Serial Ports For each port in the Serial Ports Configured section select a Protocol Configured Baud Rate and Flags Protocol The available options are e ptUndefined e ptMultiDropFullDuplex e ptMultiDropHalfDuplex Baud Rate Do not change the Baud Rate from 38400 The only exception is when using extremely long cable lengths and then the baud rate must be set to 9600 Table 25 Port Configuration Settings Page 84 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 5 7 5 7 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Description The Flags options are advanced settings and should normally be left unselected Column Flags e Embedded Polls Embeds polls in the message queue e Ignore Inhibits Causes the controller to ignore any routes inhibits that have been specified in the database IP Panels Check the checkbox to Enable IP Panels The default port number is 3010 If a configuration or database already exist this will be set to 1 Port Con
181. ess levels for different displays on the same panel Audio Modify Video Reference Operations Common Rules While config AUD parameters is enabled then only AUD parameters can be pre selected i e sources and destinations cannot be dialled up Press lt CLEAR gt while in this mode to return the panel to its previous state If the display audio parameters function is disabled then full 8 character names is displayed with no AUD parameter even if the first level is Analogue Audio Selecting display audio function results in the eighth character of the displays showing the AUD parameter assigned for the most significant active level Assuming display audio parameters is enabled then The eighth character in PRESET and STATUS displays is e Steady non flashing when source AUD parameter is NORMAL Flashing when source AUD parameter is NOT NORMAL for example SWAP Eighth character in PRESET window displays AUD parameter of the pre selected source displayed for the most significant active level in the system Eighth character in STATUS displays AUD parameter of combined source and destination taken for the most significant active level Eighth character in DESTINATION displays the destination AUD parameter of the destination displayed for the most significant active level in the system If lt CONFIG AUDIO gt is pressed to enable configuration of AUD parameters and no buttons are pressed within a 1 minute time
182. eus controller The second router which is connected to the first using SW P 02 Out protocol has a Nebula controller and is also a master The third router has a slave control card so receives its routing information from the Nebula master controller The routers are connected to the master through serial connections Control panels can be connected either serially or via Ethernet with the Nucleus controller Matrix 1 Master Master Slave Nucleus Nebula Nebula Level 2 Level 3 Fig 5 Single Matrix Multiple Levels Fig 6 shows three routers and each has its own matrix Each router is a master and has a Nucleus controller The panels are connected to each master through serial connections Each router has one or more levels and operates completely independently Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 11 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Introduction Matrix 1 Matrix 2 Matrix 3 CITH TT I TT Master Nucleus Master _ Nucleus 8 T Teva 2 La Fig 6 Multiple Matrix Multiple Levels Fig 7 shows three routers and each has its own matrix Each router is a master and has a Nucleus controller The panels are connected to each master through an external 2330 controller Each router has one or more levels Matrix 1 Matrix 2 Matrix 3 Nucleus Level Level 1 Level j Level2_ Level2_
183. evel buttons protect and panel lock 32 sources to 4 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 36 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 48 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 48 sources to 4 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 52 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 72 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 16 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 16 sources to 2 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 24 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 8 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 16 sources to 16 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 32 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 16 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 32 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 8 sources to 8 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock or 16 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock Table 56 Supported 1U Panel Types Continued Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 221 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference D 1 2 2U Panels Panel Description
184. existing database either locally or on the network 2 4 8 1 Create a New Workbench Database To create a new Workbench Database 1 Expand the Workbench Database section 2 Click Click here to create databases and permissions A command window displays briefly and connects to the database 3 From the Install Helper click the Refresh button The Workbench Database displays green installed correctly 2 4 8 2 Connect to an Existing Workbench Database If an existing Workbench database is available provide the file path and login credentials 1 Expand the Workbench Database section Click Click here to alter database connection settings The Connection String Editor dialog box displays Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 24 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation Fig 22 Workbench Database Connection Settings y ConnectionStringEditor Server Name localhost SQLEXPRESS Failover Partner Database Workbench User WorkbenchUser Password probel Database Connection String Data Source localhost SQLEXPRESS Initial Catalog Workbench User D WorkbenchUserPassword prabel 2 Either type the server details or edit the Database Connection String The Server Name can be an IP address or a name When using SQL Express the default for a standalone PC the Server Name must also contain an SQL instance name at the end For example the default server name is typically localhost SQLEXPRESS
185. f source routed to both channels Right channel of source routed to both channels Left and right channels swapped Source is Normal or pre selected to be Normal Source is L R or pre selected to be L R Source is R L or pre selected to be R L Source L R swapped or pre selected to be L R swapped Source using 525 trigger or pre selected to use 525 Source using 625 trigger or pre selected to use 625 No audio parameters on current most significant active level but other levels configured with audio parameters No audio parameters pre selected on most significant active level but other levels configured with audio parameter pre selected No source pre select on level thus unknown trigger No source pre select on level thus unknown audio parameter Table 58 Audio Parameters Page 225 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 D 2 17 D 2 18 D 2 19 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference Configure Audio Parameters This feature can be applied to 6276 X Y and 6277 multi bus panels only lt is enabled by assigning one of the special function buttons to be of the lt CONFIG AUD gt type When pressed not only are the source and destination audio parameters indicated by the eighth character of the display as in the previous table but they may also be changed When enabled this feature allows pre selection of destination AUD parameters for stereo analogue audio levels If panel is a Master 6276 X Y then enabling this feature a
186. fied reference at a particular standard or add a delay Audio Output Processing AES apply sample rate conversion delay gain and select stereo mode Audio Output Processing MADI apply sample rate conversion delay gain and select stereo mode Page 161 2013 Snell Limited Workbench A 10 1 A 10 1 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples To return to the Main Menu from any of these screens click on the Menu button at the bottom left of each screen The Video Routing and Audio Routing screens can be accessed directly from each other without the need to return to the Main Menu Audio Processing Audio processing is live so any changes to the audio are immediately applied However mixed channels are not apparent until they are shuffled Within all processing screens the selectable processes display at the top of each screen Dial up Keypad For each of the screens use the dial up keypad on the left of the screen to select the signal for processing either video with embedded audio or discrete audio PRESET Clear e Enter Source Fig 161 Dial up Keypad When using the video input and output screens additional mnemonics buttons display to allow for quick dial up of named sources destinations These buttons can be further defined in Design mode Studio Cam AY A e AA OU 1 o y J g n o
187. figuration Settings Table 25 Configuring Additional Devices Further devices types may be added to a controller The devices that are available depend on the controller type e Nucleus Controller 2450 This is a controller configured as a Router controller and Panels device only Centra Controller 2330 246x PC This is a hardware controller that can be configured as any combination of devices see Table 26 Some devices cannot be configured on the same controller as other devices See Table 26 for compatibility Add a New Device to the Controller To add a device 1 Click on the Devices Tab The current devices assigned to the controller display on the left hand side of the screen Fa Controller Configuration A C Add Remove Devices Sirius 840 IP Address 172 31 9 118 Port 2007 Assigned Devices Configuration LocalRouterDevice PanelDevice RouterDevice Local Router Configuration Fig 74 Devices Tab Page 85 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 2 Click on the Add Remove Devices buiton The screen now displays the current devices on the right hand side of the screen with a list of the available devices displayed on the left hand side of the screen Fa Controller Configuration eo III jee Devices Routers Local Router Hardware a Sirius 840 Ci re Devices IP Address 172 31 9 118 Port 2007 Available Devices
188. figured as XY and is configured in the panel properties When enabled any destination assigned to the panel that does not have a primary level association indicates this by flashing the primary level panel lamp and showing the next active level source in the status display This feature is not currently supported Display Audio Parameters This feature can be applied to 6276 X Y and 6277 multi bus panels only It is enabled by assigning one of the special function buttons to be of the DISPLAY AUD type When pressed source and destination audio parameters are indicated by the eighth character in the source and destination displays for the most significant stereo Analogue Audio level in the system this may require the level buttons to be toggled on or off in order to show the desired audio level This feature is currently supported on a 2450 controller only Table 58 defines the symbols used Symbol Space Steady S Steady M Flash N and Flash S and Flash M and Flashing L Flashing R Flashing S NRM or NRM L R or L R R L or R L SWP or SWP 525 or 525 625 or 625 Steady gt Flashing gt with D TRG AUP Description Indicates normal source or destination Indicates destination is Swapped Indicates destination is Mono Normal destination pre selected Swapped destination pre selected Mono destination pre selected Left channel o
189. for the destination audio track Click the button for the source audio track The Preset tally indicates the audio selected for the destination track Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all audio tracks required are setup Click on the Take button The audio sources are routed to the destination A 11 Audio Reference A controller can be configured to distribute an AES reference around the router so that the audio output cards can lock to it The AES reference generated is either a free running clock set to a selectable AES clock rate or it can be locked to a physical input reference on the router either of the incoming AES references or one of the video references To lock to an internally generated reference the Generic Configuration Editor is used For all controllers the audio reference controls are in the BaseReference section of ReferenceControl branch See Fig 169 for an example where the ReferenceControl is situated in a 246x controller tree For a 2450 controller the ReferenceControl is under the Config2450 branch Changes to any of these configuration values will require a push to the controller e a Generic Configuration Editor o mm 800 Single 576x576 A Ref1 4 ER Controller 172 31 7 66 2007 ie Generallnfo Ge Configurationltems Ce LoggingSettings oe Version lt La Devices 4 Q Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice e Generallnfo Gei LocalRouterConfig ie Generallnfo ba InputPorts La OutputP
190. formats are accepted e Time One second after noon can be expressed as 12 00 01 hh mm ss preferred 120001 hhmmss 12 0 1 h m s Date The first of January 2009 can be expressed as 01 01 2009 dd mm yyyy preferred 01 01 09 dd mm yy A two digit year 2000s is assumed 01012009 ddmmyyyy 010109 ddmmyy A two digit year 2000s is assumed 1 1 9 d m y e Day of the Week The format must be the full day in words Monday 7 4 1 3 DCCP This associates an input with a DCCP field To add a DCCP input either select it from the toolbox or click the m button from the Inputs editor Each physical entry in the controller s database has an OID address Object Identifier Navigate to the required OID either from the Behavior drop down list in the Property Editor or click the button to open the Choose Dccp Field browser see Fig 120 DCCP Input o Behaviour ba Choose Dccp Field Controller UMDDrivera gt Ze LoggingController Ke Name ei Version E TTT J Devices lar LoggingController a E Devices 1 FieldStoreDevice nes i fot Version a ha Fields da Devices 3 Fields 1 SY Devices 1 UMDDevice lt gt Name da UMDGroups Gi Timestamp Actions E Gei UMDGroups 1 Stringvalue m a E Q Comma Se ei DoubleValue I EEN 4 e TE RE Lei UseLastRunViewChanges am As LMDArray R a Gei Fields 3 Ml e el b 5 Fields 4 gt Fields 5 gt Fields 6 H E E 5 Fields 7 gt Fields 3
191. gTools General DirectoryHelper DriversDirectory var 03 01 2012 173 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configstoreDirectory 03 01 2012 173 INFO 6744 LogTools General about to create an XmldbBackedconfigbi 03 01 2012 173 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configDirectory Appl 03 01 2012 174 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configDirectory Datt 03 01 2012 174 DEBUG 6744 LogTools General About to get DirectoryHelper DriversDi 03 01 2012 174 DEBUG 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper DriversDirectory var 03 01 2012 174 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configstoreDirectory 03 01 2012 361 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup steel domain with mode Block 03 01 2012 812 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup Domain built setting up session 03 01 2012 854 INFO 6744 LogTools StartUp DO NET setup complete 03 01 2012 854 INFO 6744 LogTools Startup Created new ModelRoot 03 01 2012 855 INFO 6744 LogTools rales Starting messenger service 03 01 2012 455 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configDirectory Appl 03 01 2012 455 INFO 6744 LogTools General DirectoryHelper configDirectory Datt 03 01 2012 455 INFO 6744 LogTools eeh ConfigDirectory C Users Stuartchee 03 01 2012 455 DEBUG 6744 LogTools General About to get DirectoryHelper DriversDi 03 01 2012 455 DEBUG 6744 LogTools General Directo
192. ges to show only the items containing the filter text in the source or destination name e Click on the Clear button to remove a filter A Filter Clear Fig 52 Filter 5 5 4 Port Configuration The Port Configuration window specifies which COM port on the host machine is used to communicate with the controller and the protocol used The internal COM port usage described is not applicable when using a PC controller e Click Port configuration The available COM ports display on the left of the window see Fig 53 5 5 4 1 Serial IP Port Configuration a Port Configuration Serial IP Port Configuration Matrix Ports Available Ports 127 0 0 12 2007 Configured Ports COM4 COM6 LocalControl COM5 Press Port New Seria Port New IP Port Port Settings Name COM3 Serial Port Properties Serial IP Serial Protocol General Switcher In SWP02 OK Cancel Fig 53 Serial IP Port Configuration Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 56 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration COM1 and COM2 are internal COM ports For S800 Series routers Port 1 must be set to Local Controller Port 1 is an internal port for setting a simulator on a PC with no COM ports For Nucleus controllers the local port is required for internal crosspoint settings COM3 is the first external serial port and connects to Port 1 on the router rear panel see Table 12
193. hain Start Device X Output Forward Tally X X X X X X X Passive default X X X X X X X xX X XX XX X XX X X X X X X XX X Screen List X X x x X X x x X X x x X X x x x x x x xX Selected Clip X Selected Layout X Selected Playout Device X Snapshot List X X X X X X Table 61 Combo Box Behaviors E 2 6 Edit Button The Edit Button control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial up Groups The Edit Button sets a value in a DCCP field to a text value The DCCP field must be a text field such as a Name UseLastRunViewChanges or StringValue If the DCCP field is set to change a DoubleValue field an error displays at runtime E 2 7 Image Behavior 2 S Si p S a S gt S z Q az Jaks W A 2 Oo o o o 3 o XX D 2 gt gt Q o SE 2 5 51 5 m xA S e 5 Siks O oo o o E d le eO ole aaa 2232 o aak E or e e Ss A Z SS EE HE ELL 2220005335332 ee e me E BS Sg Z Sal Olli SF S S el el el EI ELS SS EI oi BS S S SI S 553 5 53 0 AR SSS si sl cav oo0oo0oo0og IL II IILOOOTITTI 22 222200K f40F Alt Dest XIXIXIX Alt Level xX x x X Config Audio x x x X Delegate X X X x Dest Assign x X X X Dest Source Select X X X X Dest Source Select Tally xX Display Audio xX x x X Image Tally X X xX X Table 62 Image Behaviors Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 235 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Control Behaviors Behavior aj 2 x a
194. hardware panels Running a hardware panel displays an error stating that the initial screen is disabled This option is changed in the screen properties window The hardware panel requires a valid controller with a panel and keypad see Hardware Panels Reference on page 220 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 81 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 6 1 1 Configuring a Router Controller as a Panel Device To edit the controller 1 Open the Configuration window To access the Configuration screen log in as a user with Configuration permissions see section 4 3 Select the controller and click the Edit Controller Config button The Controller Configuration window displays The tabs that are available depend on the type of controller Select the Devices tab Check the PanelDevice checkbox The Panels configuration has two buttons e Add Panel starts the Add Hardware Panels Wizard see section 5 6 1 2 e Configure Panels opens the Hardware Panels Configuration Editor see section 5 6 1 3 5 6 1 2 Add Hardware Panel Wizard The Add Hardware Panel Wizard lists several pre defined screens for creating a layout that has several parameters already configured For each new panel the wizard adds a screen with the following Controller The behavior of the panel is set to the controller being configured Keypad Each new keypad is labeled Keypad1 Keypad2 and so on Panel Each
195. hat a mnemonic or number is assigned to a button The sources and or destinations can then be selected by making a single or series of button presses to select an input or output A keypad that dials up sources only requires a single SourceKeypad sequence set A keypad that dials up destinations only requires a single DestinationKeypad sequence set If a panel dials up both sources and destinations it requires both a SourceKeypad sequence set and a DestinationKeypad sequence set Sequence Config In the Configuration Window these settings configure the number of sequence sets in the system Sequence sets group the key sequences defined in Design mode that are required to enter sources and destinations Table 24 lists the Sequence Config options Column Description Number of To specify the number of sequence sets available in the system enter Sequence Sets the required number and then click Apply Name The name of the sequence set Type For each sequence set select a type from the drop down list e SourceKeypad DestinationKeypad e SoftSourceKeypad e SoftDestinationKeypad Table 24 Sequence Configuration Settings Port Config In the Configuration window the Hardware Panels Port Config tab specifies which COM port on the host machine is set to communicate with the controller Do not confuse the ports listed in the Hardware Panels Configuration editor with the ports listed in the Router Controller Column D
196. he default screen 2 Atthe bottom right of the window select the Screens Editor tab 3 Either on the Screens Editor tab click the Add button or on the toolbar click the g button The Add New Screen dialog box displays Type a name for the new screen for example Screen 1 and click OK The new screen is added to the list To open any screen in the list double click on the thumbnail Only one screen can be open at a time A 2 2 Modify Screen Properties 1 From the toolbar click the 2 button The Toolbox displays at the bottom of the window 2 Next to the Screens Editor tab select the Property Window tab Alternatively right click anywhere outside the panel and select Screen Properties 3 Change the size of the screen to 390 x 560 all dimensions are in pixels Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 148 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 2 3 Modify Panel Properties 1 Click anywhere on the panel and from the property window set the dimensions to 330 x 500 and the Position to left 30 top 30 Click and drag the panel to any position in the screen 2 Click the button at the top right of the panel This creates a new Group tab called Group 1 3 Click the Group 1 tab and then the button The Group properties open in the Property Window A 2 4 Modify Group Behavior 1 From the Behavior drop down list select Router BPX Behavior The full properties for this router ar
197. his example shows how to configure a Slider Up and Down or Composite controller control to set a value in a controller 1 2 Create a new panel Add a new Group and set it to Generic behavior Add a Numeric control and set the Minimum and Maximum values For example 1 and 10 For Composite sliders set the Calibrated Value Set the Behavior to DCCP Set Oid property to an appropriate DoubleValue see Fig 151 Fig 151 List Box Property Selection Choose Decp Field E Gei LoggingController Gei Version E As Devices E Devices 1 FieldStoreDevice E da Fields E Gei Fields 1 ot Name Le Timestamp Lei StringWalue Lal DoubleValue Lei UseLastRunViewChanges To show that the Numeric Control works at run time add a Label that displays the slider value 6 7 8 9 Add a Label control and assign it to the same group as the slider Set the behavior to DCCP Copy the OID value from the slider and paste it into the label behavior specific OID Save and run the example As the slider is moved the label displays the current value A 6 Radio Buttons This example shows how to configure a Radio Button control to set a value in a controller k A A UN Issue 1 Rev 4 Create a new panel Add a new Group and set it to Generic behavior Add a Radio Button control Set the behavior to DCCP Set Oid property to an appropriate field use numeric values for DoubleValue fields For exampl
198. ice AxonDevice l DartNetGatewayDevice DensiteDevice FieldStoreDevice GPiDevice KeypadsDevice 1 LocalRouterDevice LookupDevice MDUDevice 1 MultiViewerDevice l PanelDevice RouterDevice SatelliteDevice l SNMPGenDevice l SourceQueueDevice l TestDevice TielinesDevice Table 26 Available Devices Description For creating local alarms and reporting to Workbench alarm screens see section 5 7 3 Required to connect to Axon modular with supported modules see section 5 8 1 Required to connect to Vistek modular requires CANUSB adapter on PC can only run on PC not dual redundant see section 5 8 1 Miranda protocol for modular see section 5 8 1 For use as a transient data storage controller allows use of screen recall strings and passing of values to rules service see section 5 7 4 For configuring GPls currently on 2330 only see section 5 7 5 Required for soft panel keypad setup and re use see section 5 8 1 Audio router configuration see section 5 5 1 Used to define lookup tables for cases where a value needs translating to another value see section 5 8 1 SNMP interface to GPI collator TSL MDU box see section 5 8 1 To connect to multiviewers and allow screen recalls etc Currently only supports Miranda and Snell Multi Viewers see section 5 8 1 For a worked Example of setting up a Multiviewer see Configure a MultiViewer on page 160 For configurat
199. igitalVideo v Automatic lt Clear gt w lt Clear gt sl OneToOne Forward v Fig 59 Levels Configuration Editor e Edit the Levels parameters according the following Column Description Matrices Shows the Matrix names The number of Matrices is set in the Router Configuration Editor Levels Shows the level name The number of levels for each Matrix is set in the Router Configuration Editor Type Select from the list of audio video and data types Park Mode Only valid if the type is set to RS422 When an RS422 router is in one to one routing mode unused destinations must be parked at the park source ot position To free a source there are two options e Automatic Workbench controls the parking e Manual The operator must set the parking Park Source Only valid if the type is set to RS422 The park source reference for RS422 routing Park Dest Only valid if the type is set to RS422 The park destination reference for RS422 routing Routing Only valid if the type is set to RS422 Routing mode is either Mode a e One to One One source to one destination e Broadcast One source to multiple destinations Direction This sets the direction of signal flow for the current router level Direction is either e Forward Source to Destination e Reverse Destination to Source Table 16 Levels Configuration Settings Page 62 2013 Snell Limited Workbench
200. ination Follow 159 Dynamic UMUe 184 Link Panels Together 147 Live Henammg 154 Mimic Diagrams ccccsseseeeeeeeees 173 Monitor Buttons 157 Numeric Controls neccen 155 Panel Without a Take Button 146 Radio Buttons 155 RollCall Screens 1 0 0 eee 176 Router Follow 183 Set Controller Redundancy Over IP 178 Set UP Tie lmnes 179 Video broceseimg 161 XY Soft Panel 143 F FieldStore Device 89 Firmware Update cccococcccccccccccccconcnnncnno 192 200 Force Reset aaaeienreenerernnnn 71 171 Frame Gvnc 167 FTP Update Controller 192 Function Buttons 222 G Generic Editor 94 159 GPI DOV ICC E 90 GPI Overrides coocccocccncccnnccnnccnnccnncnnnoss 177 Group DBehavore ccceccseceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeess 114 GODS E 114 Page 249 Index H Hardware Hanels 112 220 Configuration Editor 83 Function Buttons 222 Key Sequences cooococccccccccnncnncnononos 121 Panel Features 222 Panel Switch Settings 222 Bei E 84 Special Funchons 222 Supported Panels oooocccccccccncnnnnn 220 o reises iee aieka 82 Home Screen coccccccnccccccncncnononcnononnnononinnnos 32 I Image BUS ees i 127 Installation cocoooccnccncnnccnonnncnonnnononononos 14 Heouremente en 14 IP Port Configurati0N oocccccccccnnnncccc 57 K Key Assignment cccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 Key Geouence 121
201. ine tally table see section 5 7 8 Note A UMDEngineDevice cannot be on the same controller as a UMDDevice For connecting to VT Rs video servers see section 5 8 1 Table 26 Available Devices H Devices that do not have their own configuration wizard must be configured using the Generic Editor See Generic Editor on page 94 More than one device can be selected for each controller However some devices cannot run on the same port For example a Tie Lines device cannot be on the same port as a UMD Engine device Alarm Device An alarm device is one that creates local Workbench alarms and reports them to Workbench alarm screens e Select AlarmDevice and click on the Edit Alarms button The Alarm controller screen displays Alarm Controller Configuration ix Alarm Sets Alarms Fig 76 Alarm Configuration Screen Name SR Page 88 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration To add alarms 1 Click on the Add button for the Alarm Sets field An unnamed alarm set is added 2 Click on the Edit Name button to attribute a name to the Alarm Set 3 Click on the Add button for the Alarm field An Alarm1 alarm is added 4 Click on the Edit Name button to attribute a name to the Alarm Further alarms may be added to the set and renamed accordingly Further Alarm Sets may also be added if required 5 Click OK when all alarms and alarm sets h
202. ines Editor Available Router Controller s Matrix 1 Matrix 2 synchronise tie line tally table Export to CSV Import from CSV Fig 181 Tie Lines Editor Selected Router Controller s Add Remove Swap Add new tie line Le JLo ze L oe 711 cancel 11 zen 6 Select a controller and click on the Add button Repeat for the second controller 7 Click on the Add new tie line button 8 Enter a Name Group and Owner for the tie line Tie lines to the Soft Panel on page 182 The Owner field is used to link tie lines to specific soft panels See Assign Specific 9 Select the Start and End point for the tie line from the drop down boxes 10 Add asecond and a third tie line and repeat aa Tie Lines Editor Name Tie Line 1 Selected Router Controller s Auto Y Group 1 Router Matrix Matrix 1 gt Video Matrix 1 Owner Lock Name User z Level Video Enim sl Dest O P 0001 Router Matrix Matrix 2 gt Video z Level Video Name Tie Line 2 z Source iP 0001 Auto Y Group 2 Router Matrix Matrix 1 gt Video Owner Lock Name User y Level Video sl Dest 0 P 0002 Router Matrix Matrix 2 gt Video v Level Video Name Tie Line 3 D Source I P 0002 Auto Group 3 Router Matrix Matrix 1 gt Video
203. ing the channels When setting channel ordering ensure that each channel is given a unique order number otherwise the error icon wes displays and the channels will not map correctly ke Short Name Part 1 Left Part 1 Right Fig 71 Example Error A red outline displays around any errors to help determine where the fault is 8 Check the Safe checkbox of a channel that does not require routing Where channels are set to Safe the safe source for that level is routed Program Sets Combine Mapped Programs and single channels into sets for frequently used setups A maximum of 64 channels 82 channels of embedded audio or 64 MADI can be grouped and routed together before being assigned to both sources and destinations Es Audio Mapping Configuration oo Source Sizes Destination Sizes Safe Sources Mapped Programs Program Sets Source Assignment Destination Assignment All Audio Program Sets Selected Program Set Program Set Name Program 1 English Size a E R Program 1 French AA A 2 intro English Right Background Part Background Part 1 2 Background Part Add New Delete Selected Fig 72 Program Sets Page 77 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 5 5 7 4 www snellgroup com Configuration To create a Program Set 1 Type a name for the Program Set 2 Set the size of the Program Set making sure that the size is large enough to a
204. ini e Undo Tally x X xX X X X Ix Version Info X X x x X X x x X X X X X X X X X X X X X Table 65 Label Behaviors H Pre defined times or Microsoft custom date and time format strings E 2 12 Composite Slider The Composite Slider control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups E 2 13 Slider The Slider control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups E 2 14 Up Down The Up Down control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups E 2 15 Hyperion Thumbnail The Hyperion Thumbnail control is valid for all Groups E 2 16 Jog Shuttle The Jog Shuttle control is only valid for the Playout Device Group The available behaviors are e Cue Clip e Cue To e Jog e Pause e Play e Shuttle e Stop e VAR E 2 17 List Buttons The List Buttons control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 239 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 E 2 18 E 2 19 E 2 20 E 2 21 E 2 22 E 2 23 E 2 24 E 2 25 E 2 26 E 2 27 E 2 28 www snellgroup com Control Behaviors Media Player The Media Player control is valid for all Groups except Hardware Radio Buttons The Radio Buttons control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups Source Queue The Source Queue control is only valid as a Source Queue behavior fo
205. io manipulation is performed on the source audio Default SourceAudioLeftBoth The left channel of a stereo source pair is routed to both the left and right channels on the output SourceAudioRightBoth The right channel of a stereo source pair is routed to both the left and right channels on the output SourceAudioSwap The left and right channel of a stereo source pair are swapped before being routed to the output Table 18 Source Audio Modifies Table 19 lists the Destination Audio Modifies Destination Description DestAudioNormal No audio manipulation is performed on the destination audio Default DestAudioSwap The left and right channel of a stereo source pair are swapped before being routed to the output DestAudioMono A stereo source pair is routed to a mono destination Table 19 Destination Audio Modifies After configuring source and destination audio modifies click Apply to save the setup Salvos A salvo is an operation that allows multiple otherwise unrelated routes to be selected with a single button press They are stored in the controller and fired by a reference from a control panel Salvos are generated by adding crosspoints in the Salvo Editor or by importing salvos previously saved as comma separated text files e Click Salvos The Salvos Editor window displays Fa Salvo Editor Matrix Matrix 1 Add Salvo Destination Associations Source Associations ra MEA a 1 O
206. ion of hardware control panels needed on Nucleus 2450 or with 2330 246x This must be on the same controller as a Router Device see section 5 6 1 For controlling one or more routers see section 5 5 Interface for satellite positioning control see section 5 8 1 Control devices via SNMP see section 5 8 1 Note Associated MIB files are required Not for general use required for reverse mimic chains and queuing sources to feed to a clean feed path see section 5 8 1 Not for general use May be used for a controller that is no longer required Note If this device is in use DO NOT DELETE Tie line controller talks to one or more router drivers to make tie line routes required for mimic diagram see section 5 7 6 Note A Tie Lines Device cannot be on the same controller as a Router Device with which it communicates or on the same controller as a UMDEngineDevice Page 87 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 Y www snellgroup com Configuration Device UMDDevice UMDEngineDevice VideoPlayoutDevice l Description Sending names to an Under Monitor Display UMD currently supports 8 protocols different strings over IP and serial ports see section 5 7 7 Note A UMD Device cannot be on the same controller as a UMDEngineDevice Communicates with a Tie lines device The UMD Engine provides a mechanism to automatically update the text displayed on the UMDs with the destinations source name in the tiel
207. iple audio source sizes in a level can be set when the sizes are to be same across the level or part of the level To setup an individual audio source size 1 Check the Multi Source checkbox 2 Ifthe input source is discrete audio rather than audio embedded in a video input check the Audio Only checkbox 3 Select the number of inputs according to the following Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 73 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Mono 1 Stereo 2 SD HD 16 3G 32 MADI 56 64 Note there are only 12 inputs per card using MADI The default is O zero Click on the button to set Audio Address IDs these are mono audio addresses The Edit Audio Addresses screen displays 1 Edit Audio Addresses ca Il el ma Video Matrix gt Level 1 gt 1 m01s0001 No Audio Address ID Make Sequential bh RSC 2 P y 3 3 D 4 4 Y 5 E y 6 6 S 8 8 x 9 9 v 10 1 Paste All Copy All pur Fig 68 Audio Address IDs T Enter an ID number in the first address box Click on the Make Sequential button immediately to the right of the address ID entered to automatically fill the remaining addresses for the current port if they are contiguous Click OK It is good practice to number the address IDs according to the maximum number of possible inputs regardless of how many i
208. irect correspondence with a particular piece of hardware Typically a level depends on the operational requirements and represents groups of inputs and outputs such as video or audio or data A matrix is a routing system made up of one or more levels which is controlled as a single entity Fig 4 Level 1 Video only Matrix Level 2 Audio only Level 3 Data only Fig 4 Matrix Diagram Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 10 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Introduction Associations are a method of grouping together signals so that they can be routed together on a single press of a button For example VTR signal levels can be grouped into a single association e Level 1 video e Level 2 audio e Level 3 control signal source Associations refer to the group of sources and Destination Associations refer to a group of signals at a destination for example a monitor By default Associations names are derived from the top level name The Association Source and Destination names can be changed through the Names Editor See Names on page 53 1 4 Configurations for Multiple Routers There are several ways of configuring a series of routers depending on your requirements For all configurations Workbench can be connected during operation as a soft panel GUI control interface Fig 5 shows three routers that are configured so that there is one matrix The first router is a master and has a Nucl
209. is dependent on cards and rear connectors fitted to Pyxis frame All MADI Inputs and Outputs have been hidden mapped out in the Logical to Physical port mapping tables so that controller is purely the MONO inputs and outputs only Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs Pyxis AA 544x544 Mono 64 MADI A Ref1 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 544x544 MONO actual router size is dependent on cards and rear connectors fitted to Pyxis frame All MADI Inputs and Outputs are exposed in the Logical to Physical port mapping tables on to one so that they are controllable please refer to the Pyxis handbook Audio Port Numbering section for more details Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary referenc
210. ither type or paste the OID value or click the button to open the Choose DCCP Field browser Valid OID values are colored green Invalid OID values are colored red 3 Select the End Controller from the drop down list 4 Select the End OID address Either type or paste the OID value or click the button to open the Choose DCCP Field browser Valid OID values are colored green Invalid OID values are colored red If the Start and End OID addresses match the match icon changes from JA to EJ Page 100 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 If the entries match click the Find Usages button A list of all occurrences displays 6 To globally change all the OID references click the Rewrite OIDs button 5 9 7 3 Snapshot Editor The Snapshot Editor allows all or a selection of crosspoints from each controller on the live system to be saved for restoring at a later time Also saved snapshot files csv can be edited 1 Click Snapshot Editor The Snapshot Editor window displays E Snapshot Editor Sea Select Deselect All Click Snapshot or Load Cancel Fig 88 Snapshot Editor 2 Click on the Snapshot button All current crosspoints for each controller display ME Snapshot Editor flojas 800 Single 576x576 A Ref1 Offline Sirius 830 Example Offline 4 F Video Matrix E Level 1 a E
211. l Computer gt OSDisk C Temp gt v co H Search Temp DI Organize v New folder ha e OSDisk C a Name z Date modified Type Size D MFGN ging e Button maps 30 11 2012 12 57 File folder a MSOCach EN salvo csv 27 07 2012 11 07 Microsoft Office E 1 KB A o 5 EN snapshot csv 13 12 2011 12 09 Microsoft Office E 143 KB utput Be S i Gl tielines csv 15 03 2012 15 49 Microsoft Office E 1 KB erfLogs de Program Files de Program Files 3 de ProgramData Le RollMap Li RollPod de Temp A Users de Vega Upgrade _ File name snapshot csv E Save as type csv files csv a Hide Folders Save Cancel Fig 90 Save Snapshot File In the dialog box that displays browse to the location for the file to be saved enter a filename and click Save Once the file is saved a dialog box displays indicating the number of crosspoints saved Fig 91 Crosspoints Saved e Click OK to close this dialog box The snapshot is saved as a csv file The contents of the snapshot file may be edited using an external editor for example Microsoft Excel Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 102 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Loading a Snapshot e Click Load to load a previously saved snapshot a Load Snapshot xm JON Computer OSDisk C Temp gt v Search Temp p Organize v New folder v EN a Music gt Name Date modified Type
212. l IP or GPI that communicates with a PC router or modular frame Set up a controller to match the system requirements That is the configuration of the routers panels third party interfaces and so on in the system 5 4 1 Add a New Controller 1 Click Add Controller and the Controller Wizard displays Fs Controller Wizard Fig 41 Select Controller Type Select the type of controller to be added Type Centra Controller 2330 246x PC Select the statement that describes your needs I have a controller available on the network and I need to copy the configuration to my local settings O I want to create a new configuration to push to a controller that is on the network I am working offline and want to create a new controller to use at a later time Cance ed Previous Next Let Finish 2 From the drop down list click on the relevant controller type Nucleus Controller 2450 Configured as a Router controller and Panels device A Nucleus 2450 Controller is installed inside a physical router usually as a pair RollCall Gateway Centra Controller 2330 246x PC Generic controller that can be configured for a Router or any combination of the devices available 3 Click on the appropriate radio button according to the configuration required have a controller available on the network and need to copy the configuration to my local settings to add a controller and use the e
213. l Programs Snell SQLDBTOOL SQLDBTool Fig 23 SQLDBTool Screen Available Servers LT DNH MR 03557 SQLEXPRESS v Include networked SQL servers Se SQLDBTool Version 1 0 221 721 Authentication IP Addresses Active SQL SQL Usemame WorkbenchUser 172 31 7 143 SQL Password probel Finding SQL 2005 2008 2008R2 Servers N LT DNH MR 03557 SGLEXPRESS S LT DNH MR 03557 1 SQLEXPRESS Windows V 10 50 1600 1 i Done Database Connect and get databases SQL Access Ca File Access Ca Target Database e type in a name above for a new database Operation Backup Mode 0 Restore Mode SQL Backup Path to Backup File C VM Centra SQLTOOL BAK a A 6 Select the server name from the drop down list at the top of the screen Click Connect and Get Databases Type a name for the new database in the Target Database field In the Operation section of the screen ensure that the Backup Mode radio button is selected Browse to the path of where the backup files for the database are to be saved Click Create Database No further configuration of this database is required The Workbench application configures the remainder of the database settings and builds all of the tables Page 26 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 4 11 Create a Blank Database Using SQLMS 2 4 12 Important Issue 1 Rev 4 To create a new database SQL Server
214. l hereby grants to and the Buyer accepts a non exclusive non If you accept the terms of the agreement dick I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install Snell Centra Nullsoft Install System v2 46 Fig 12 License Agreement 9 Read through the license and click Agree Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 16 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Installation 10 The Choose Components screen displays iP Snell Centra Setup moy ES Choose Components snell E Choose which features of Snell Centra you want to install Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue Select components to install NET Framework 3 5 SE NET Framework 4 Visual C 2010 Redi Windows Powershell SOL DE Tool SOL Server Express Core Files Space required 152 3MB Fig 13 Choose Components 11 Select the Workbench components to install and clear those that are not required for installation Table 1 lists the available options Greyed out items are mandatory The installer checks to see whether the item is already present and only installs it if it is not found Page 17 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Installation Component Description Required Required for Client for Server MSI 4 5 Microsoft Windows Installer 4 5 Y Y NET Framework 3 5 SP1 NET Framework 3
215. l locked Remote Panel Disable Input The remote panel disable input is enabled in the database panel configuration The system detects a locked panel through pin 8 of the Overrride AUX inputs located on the socket connector on the rear of the panel To lock the panel pin 8 needs to be connected to O V Operation When the panel is locked the associated lock button LED lamp is illuminated and for panels with alphanumeric displays the Preset display indicates LOCKED The panel is thus prevented from pre selecting and routing sources The Panel Disable Input takes priority over the lock button on the front and whilst the Panel Disable Input is active the Lock button has no action Page 226 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference D 2 20 Making selections D 2 21 Issue 1 Rev 4 Crosspoint selections or routes are made provided e The destination and source are valid for the level e The destination is controllable e The level is active and controllable e The route is not inhibited e Destination is not protected e An override is not active on this destination unless the source is a higher priority override Panels with Displays 6276 and 6277 panels have alphanumeric displays for 8 character messages The table below defines warning messages used throughout the range Valid source selections are shown on PRESET or STATUS displays as defined by
216. l over to the Standby controller which now has the updated configuration 4 Wait for the restarted controller to boot now as the Standby controller and push the new configuration to it 5 Force a reset of the Standby controller to activate the new configuration 6 Restart the clients closed previously Push and pull configurations to part of the database through the Online Editor See Online Editor on page 95 Controllers can be configured to restart automatically after a full database push This is set in the Generic Editor for 2330 246x PC controllers See Generic Editor on page 94 For 2450 controllers this is set in the config ini file See Configuration Initialization File on page 197 Push Failure If there is a problem pushing as part of the upgrading procedure remove the dccp_config file from the controller located in the same folder as the controller exe file then push the configuration If the controller is not present or has crashed when pushing from Workbench a Failed to connect message displays after ten seconds If there are problems connecting the Failed to push configuration message displays This may be because the configuration is too large and causes a time out over the DCCP connection To stop this from happening edit the Workbench shortcut so that it increases the DCCP time out 1 Right click on the shortcut and select properties 2 Add dccpTimeout X to the e
217. late 1 From the toolbar click the button 2 In the dialog box that displays navigate to the template file 3 Click Open If the screen is to be assigned to a different system assign the relevant Group See Groups on page 114 To export a screen template 1 From the toolbar click the E button 2 Inthe dialog box that displays select a location for the file to be saved and change the name of the file if required 3 Click Save Backup and restore screens from Administration Data Management see section 4 7 Page 111 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 www snellgroup com Design Mode Panels A panel can have any number of groups and controls A panel can be either a Soft Panel or a Hardware Panel Edit the position size style and behaviors of panels using the Properties Window See Property Window on page 119 Hardware Panels A Hardware Panel is a screen template of a physical hardware device for example a control panel The position of the buttons and other controls closely resemble the positions on the physical hardware The hardware panel is configured on screen which in turn sets up the operation of the connected control panel To add edit and configure Hardware Panels see Panel Device on page 81 Soft Panels A soft panel can be configured to be anything related to the control and monitoring of the system and can be designed
218. le Addresses MV Output 3 MV Output 1 MV Output 2 MV XPT 1 XPT RU XPT M Audio XPT Fan Controllers Input and Outputs NM T N 00 O mM 233 y Y CO Hi CO DC re re re 248 247 246 245 194 193 237 238 Table 53 Sirius 830 Slot Module Address Locations 111 Redundant Crosspoint Module Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 217 Routers Reference 2 234 st LO de o S o Of OK re re re re re re 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Routers Reference C 3 Cygnus Routers C 3 1 Module Locations For each router it is important that the correct module addresses are set in the Workbench controller configuration If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set Any modules that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule Table 55 shows a summary of the module address ranges Module Address Range dec Inputs 1 to 48 Top Input row 1 to 24 Bottom Input Row 25 to 48 Outputs 129 to 152 Crosspoints 257 to 260 Monitors 2 0 to 272 Resilient crosspoints 261 to 264 Table 54 Cygnus Module Address Ranges Fig 198 shows the Cygnus card locations Input Cards 1 to 24 Monitor Card Master MON1 and 2 Crosspoint Cards XPT1 8 XPT2 Control Cards CTRL1 8 CTRL2 Output Cards 129 to 152 Crosspoint Cards XPT3 8 XPT4 Input Cards 25 to 48 Blank Slot Monitor Card
219. lected Controllers Delete the selected controller or several controllers if a group selection has been made Push Config to Push the current configuration to all selected controllers See Controller s Push and Pull Configuration on page 97 Pull Config from Pull the configuration from a controller See Push and Pull Controller s Configuration on page 97 Export Configuration Export the configuration of the current controller to a zip file Import Configuration Import a configuration file zip to the selected controller Export All Export the configuration of all controllers to a zip file Note The exported file contains controller configuration and is not a complete database backup Page 46 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 Import All Reset Pair Controllers Unpair Controllers Swap Pair Copy config to partner Refresh Connections Oid Rewriter Snapshot Editor Delete RollCall Cache www snellgroup com Configuration Import a configuration file zip to all controllers Resets the selected controller See Reset on page 98 Pair two similar controllers to give a dual redundancy See Dual Redundancy on page 98 Unpair two paired controllers set the Primary controller to be the Secondary controller and the Secondary controller to be the Primary controller See Swap Controllers on page 99 Copy the configuration of one controller to the other i
220. led green The SQL Server is optional For a server installation where the database server is elsewhere on the network do not install this component Le Lei Centra Configuration Hel Version Express Installed No Standard Installed No Could not find a local installation of SQL Server Centra Workbench requires a SQL Server connection to operate If you intend to connect to a remote SQL Server instance i e a server other than this computer then ignore this warning H If you wish to use a local database server on this computer click the button below to install SQL Server Express Edition Click here to install SQL Server Express Edition Fig 20 SQL Server Component e To install the SQL Server or to upgrade from the 2005 version on a standalone installation click Click here to install the SQL Server Express Edition An install wizard starts and runs through several screens installing both the SQL Server and SQL Server Management Studio Do not interrupt the install wizard Once the wizard is complete both the SQL Server and SQL Server Management Studio components display green 2 4 7 SQL Server Management Studio e To install the SQL Server Management Studio on a server installation click Click here to install the SQL Server Management Studio Express Edition For a standalone PC this SQL Server Management Studio component is also installed automatically when the SQL Server wizard is run
221. ler can either run on a 2330 Controller Card or it can run on a PC One of the advantages of running a 2330 controller on the PC is that soft screens can be designed without the danger of causing inadvertent disruption to a hardware controller When a design is completed push the database to the hardware controller Although this is a software controller it can see real devices that are connected to the computer s COM ports B 1 1 PC Controller To create a new 2330 Controller on a PC 1 6 f From Windows browse to the Workbench installation folder MCM Controllers Win32 and copy CentraController exe Create a new folder on the hard drive where Administration rights are granted and paste the CentraController exe into the folder Create a shortcut to CentraController exe Right click on the shortcut and select Properties At the end of the Target after Controller exe type port 2007 Where 2007 is the port number of the controller Click OK Double click the shortcut to run the dummy controller A command window displays If multiple controllers are required repeat steps 1 to 7 and give each controller a different port number and folder each instance has its own dccp config file 8 9 10 11 12 13 From Workbench open Configuration mode Click the Add Controller button The Controller Settings dialog box displays Select the Type from the drop down list For 2330 controllers select
222. list click on the relevant row for the router which has the closest specification to the router being configured 11 Click Next 12 A summary screen displays If any of the parameters on this screen are incorrect click Previous to return to the screen that requires amendment Edit the details and continue through the Controller Wizard as before a Controller Wizard Eam Summary Controller Controller Type Centra Controller 2330 246x PC Request I want to create a new configuration to push to a controller that is on the network Default Group 800 Default 800 1of2 576x576 A Refl_V3_12_2 DLT Panels Editable Main Controller Name Router_Controller 192 168 3 1 2007 Pair Controller Name Router_Controller_ Slave Address 192 168 3 2 Port 2007 Fig 44 Check Controller Details Page 50 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 13 Confirm that details for the controller configuration are correct 14 Click Finish 15 The controller is configured ha Bh a de Col D e FS Y ral Centre Wieekhench sch i Connected Mame EI Pat hype Chectuam Fremary dicing Partner li Controller Versen Addc S e e Lei Router Controller 1B 7007 Centra Controles 7230s MEPE du Primary Urdkreran a Reuter Contralier Slave EA ER 007 Centra Contealier 090 HAB PO de Lina Coobguration Bachan Fig 45 Controller Added 16 The Controller S
223. ll Location Page 18 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 14 Either accept the default destination or browse to a new destination 15 Click Install The selected components begin to install During the installation do not close the installation wizard or the Configuration Helper Wait until the entire setup process is complete before exiting the install wizard and Configuration Helper 16 Once the installation is almost complete the Configuration Helper displays in a new window Send to Clipboard Fig 15 Configuration Helper The Configuration Helper indicates the status of each of the Workbench components The components can be in one of three states e Green The component installed correctly e Orange Optional item that has not been installed If the Computer component is Orange it indicates that the screen resolution is not high enough e Red yellow during update Required by Workbench but not yet installed 17 If the Configuration Helper indicates that all components are installed correctly green click OK The Configuration Helper screen closes and the Completing installation screen displays If the Configuration Helper displays components that have not installed red these need to be manually installed before continuing See Manually Installing Components on page 20 If Workbench is run while there are components marked as red an error message di
224. llCall Screens os ccoo tensed iron ras eee ee 176 A10 GPIOVE6MdGS c 22h25e00bk dr eek a PEASE A eee PRE e 177 A 15 1 GPLPONS OR AIPAC comico aa Bho nee ws 177 A 15 2 Configuring GPI Overrides 177 A 16 Set Controller Dual Redundancy Over IP 178 A 17 Set up ONE 179 A 17 1 Set up a Tie line Controller 0 0 0 eee 179 A 17 2 Configure a Safe Source 6 ees 181 A 17 3 Configure a Soft Panel for Tie lInes ooooooooooo 181 A 18 Router e H e EEN 183 A 19 Configure Dynamic UMDs 184 A 19 1 Configure the Controllers 1 0 0 0 eee 184 Appendix B Controllers Reference 0 0 cece ee eee 187 B T2330 CONTET e Ge rara ones pe EE EE Eege a 187 BLI PG COMMOICD ockeet vote ge Ee An AO DER odors obs sews 655mm he 187 B 1 2 2330 Controller LEDS 0664225644450554 455 6546652866 250654808 187 B 1 3 Updating 2330 Controller Cards 188 Page 6 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com B 1 4 2330 Configuration bie 189 B 1 5 RollCall Operation 190 B 2 Nucleus 2450 Controller 0 0 0 0 eee eens 191 Be SCAU Css vane n eid ee deh oy ee ewe A Ph oe Be oa OF 191 B 2 2 Nucleus 2450 Firmware 0 0 0 0 cee ee eae 192 B 2 3 Nucleus 2450 LEDS 2 0 0 ccc eee 192 B 2 4 Network Initialization File 2 aana anana aa 194 B 2 5 Configuration Initialization File 0 0 0 cc eee 197 Bo 246X CONUOUCTS 2255 26224 e008 2 5460450504 0550 25560 eR85
225. llows AUD parameters to be assigned to sources and destinations and allows trigger type to be assigned to sources This feature is currently supported on a 2450 controller only Override Inputs Some panels allow a number of override inputs to momentarily override the current source routed to a destination with another source When all overrides are released the original source that was routed before any overrides were activated is restored Shorting an override input pin to O V activates the override Each override input can have any source assigned to it and can be assigned to operate on any level If more than one override input is active on a panel then the lowest number override has priority When a destination is overridden no other crosspoint can be set on that destination by any means unless it is a higher priority override The maximum number of overrides available to a panel is 16 Current supported panel s have 8 or 12 overrides available Panel Lock Most panels have the ability to disable the takes keypads and TAKE keys This can be done either using a panel lock button or by connecting a key switch or similar to the remote panel disable input Lock Button The position of the panel lock button is set in the database configuration It will also have an associated LED lamp Toggling the Lock button changes the panel between locked and unlocked with its associated LED lamp illuminating to indicate the state ON pane
226. lse only the input standard locked value is set In order for RollCall to operate the relevant templates must be copied on the controller s compact flash card The templates are included with the Workbench installer and deployed by default to the Workbench installation folder MCM Controllers RollCall Templates 2450 In this folder the folders Matrix Nucleus and XYPanel are required Optionally the folder WebContent can be copied to allow web browser access to the controller RollCall also needs to be enabled in the network ini file See Example INI File on page 196 The RollCall templates must be updated if the controller software is updated Both are included in the Workbench installer Page 199 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 3 246x Controllers A 246x 2462 2463 etc controller maps the physical inputs and outputs of the router to the software inputs Sources and outputs destinations To access the Configuration screen log in as a user with Configuration permissions see section 4 3 A 246x controller must be set as a Router controller with RouterDevice and LocalRouterDevice selected B 3 1 Features Table 48 lists the main features of the 246x Controller Feature Explanation Mapping Logical to physical source and destination mapping Source and destinations addressed by external controllers can be mapped to diffe
227. m from changing that destination The only exception to this is a Master panel Any panel type may have a Protect button assigned with 6276 and 6277 panels the function must be assigned to one of the special function buttons Protect operates on the destination assigned to each level for the destination association that was protected If a control device attached to the multi drop device ports attempts to set crosspoints on a protected destination then an error message is shown on control devices with displays If they are assigned to the same destination setting a protected destination causes protect button LEDs on other BPX type panels to flash Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 222 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 D 2 3 D 2 4 D 2 5 D 2 6 D 2 7 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference Line up This is a continuous toggle once a second of the preset and program sources to the selected destination allowing easy comparison of sources This is only available on 6276 and 6277 panels using the special function buttons Line up of sources is selected as follows e Route source to be aligned to desired destination e Make sure the level of the sources to be aligned is the most significant active level e Select reference source as the preset source e Press LINE UP button on panel The LED associated with the LINE UP button lights up to indicate that the button has been pressed e Press TAKE button of desi
228. mber of Ports text field enter the number of physical output ports and then click Apply The specified number of ports is added to the table 2 For each output port select the output type from the drop down list Continue adding the output ports in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click Apply or OK Page 69 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Module Configurations The term module refers to the card in a router on which the physical inputs and outputs are situated For module configurations for each type of router see Routers Reference on page 206 lf the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set Any modules that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownModule To manually set up module configurations 1 Inthe Number of Configurations text field enter the number of module configurations and then click Apply The specified number of configurations is added to the table 2 For each configuration select the type from the drop down list Continue adding the configurations in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click Apply or OK Module IDs e Click Edit Module IDs to specify the number and types of module IDs If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module IDs are autom
229. menu Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Pbak Deploy Tool 2 From the File menu select Configuration The Settings dialog box displays 3 Select the folder and drive locations Target Drive From the drop down list select the drive to which the CompactFlash card is attached RTB directory Specify the directory that contains the RTB executable file To ensure correct operation use the most current router RTB file available DAT directory The DAT directory contains configuration files required by the Morpheus Automation system This is not relevant for Workbench On time tools Specify the directory that contains the PbakDeploy exe file directory Show Makedisk Select this option to display progress information when writing to the progress CompactFlash card Table 45 Pbak Deploy Settings 4 O 6 Issue 1 Rev 4 Click OK In the main window select the Pbl2330Controller RTB and click Write to CF When the configuration has been written to the CompactFlash card click OK Page 188 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference 7 Update the config xml file to reflect the controller s actual IP address By default the file is located in the Workbench installation folder MCM PbakDeploy 8 Save the file and copy it to the CompactFlash card B 1 4 2330 Configuration File The following code shows a sample config xml file Update the config xml file to reflect the con
230. mes gt lt CommunitySetNames gt lt Name gt setonly lt Name gt lt CommunitySetNames gt lt SNMP gt lt C LOCK lt gt PAL Contiqueration gt lt Format gt NonDropFrame lt Format gt lt FrameRate gt Pal lt FrameRate gt Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 189 up to 10 addresses for trap managers may be configured 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference lt VitcLinel gt 19 lt VitcLinel gt lt VitcLine2 gt 21 lt VitcLine2 gt lt GenerateVitc gt false lt GenerateVitc gt lt BurninColumn gt 100 lt BurninColumn gt lt BurninLine gt 50 lt BurniInLine gt lt SyncLine gt 7 lt SyncLine gt lt Clock gt lt Contig gt B 1 5 RollCall Operation In order for RollCall to operate the relevant templates must be copied on the controller s compact flash card The templates are included with the Workbench installer and deployed by default to the Workbench installation folder MCM Controllers RollCall Templates 2330 In this folder the folders Matrix Nucleus and XY Panel are required Optionally the folder WebContent can be copied to allow web browser access to the controller RollCall also needs to be enabled in the config xml file See 2330 Configuration File on page 189 The RollCall templates must be updated if the controller software is updated Both are included in the Workbench installer Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 190 O 2013 Snell Limited Work
231. munityGetNames gt lt CommunitySetNames gt lt Name gt setonly lt Name gt lt CommunitySetNames gt lt SNMP gt lt Clock gt lt PAL configuration gt lt Format gt NonDropFrame lt Format gt lt FrameRate gt Pal lt FrameRate gt lt VitcLinel gt 19 lt VitcLinel gt lt VitcLine2 gt 21 lt VitcLine2 gt lt GenerateVitc gt false lt GenerateVitc gt lt BurnInColumn gt 100 lt BurnInColumn gt lt BurnIinLine gt 50 lt BurnInLine gt Page 203 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference lt SyncLine gt 7 lt SyncLine gt e lt Replication gt lt Name gt lt Address gt lt Porud lt Pore lt Replication gt lt FeatureFlags gt lt AutoChangeOverlfNoNetworkTime gt 1 lt AutoChangeOverlfNoNetworkTime gt lt ResetAfterConfigurationPush gt true lt ResetAfterConfigurationPush gt lt FeatureFlags gt lt Watchdog gt lt Enabled gt true lt Enabled gt lt Watchdog gt lt Contig gt B 3 5 RollCall Operation In order for RollCall to operate the relevant templates must be copied on the controller The templates are included with the Workbench installer and deployed by default to the Workbench installation folder MCM Controllers RollCall Templates S800 Copy all sub folders to the controller RollCall also needs to be enabled This is set in the Generic Online Editor under the Configurationltems node Expand the RollCall node and set Enabled to True
232. n 44 187 NT 48 PAIET nerd caidos 46 98 Orar 187 0 Or een 48 205 Ee ee 45 da 99 NGL SIO A 46 Beie te EEN 44 D Database A 246 BACK estiradas 244 CGonfguratton 9 IMPONE SE 246 C1010 BEE 246 Sa e 241 EE 241 DCCP BE e EE 130 Numeric Control Examples 155 Radio Button Examples 155 KEE 130 Default RE 36 Design Men 108 Design Mode coooccccccccccoccccnnoccconcncnnnnonnnnos 106 A DE 125 Device Evplorer 120 CO DS EE 114 Panel Templates n000nnnnanannnnn 112 Property Editor ooocccccccoommm o 119 Screen Templates ccccccoccccnnnnos 111 Screens Editor aeee 110 TOOD E EN 106 TOODO Coane mane Sen ee ee ener eee ee 115 Destination Follow 157 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Device A BEE 88 A 120 133 FieldStore coooccooccnccconccnncconccnncnnnnnnns 89 A naan 90 A 81 BR Elte E 90 IMO SE 91 92 185 UMD Engine o cccccocccnnnnncnnnoncncnncncnnnnos 93 Bt 85 Dial up Keypad ccoooocccccccococonccnncnnnnnnnnoos 124 Dual Redundancy c 00ccceeee 98 178 Dynamic UMDS occccooccccncccnnnnnccnnnnnnonanos 184 E Embedded Audio Gze o 73 Examples ccccseeeeeccsseeeceeeeeeeceeaeeees 143 Alarm Panel ccceceeceeeceeeeeseeeee 151 Audio broceseimg 161 Audio Heterence 170 Audio ROUTING 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 161 BPX Soft Panel 148 Configure A MultiViewer 160 Dest
233. n the pair ensuring the configuration matches See Copy Config to Partner on page 99 Refreshes the list of controllers and enables disables menu functions as applicable List the active controller connections See Connections on page 100 Change OID references See OID Rewrite Helper on page 100 Save the current crosspoint configuration to a snapshot file or import a saved snapshot configuration file See Snapshot Editor on page 101 Clears the cache of RollCall menu set data See Delete RollCall Cache on page 104 With a controller selected a right click displays some of the above menu items in a pop up menu plus the following additional menu items Find Usages Convert to 246x Create Default Screen Opens a new window listing the screen and rules that reference the selected controller When replacing an existing Nucleus 2450 controller with a new Nucleus 246x controller convert the 2450 configuration to that of a 246x without having to reconfigure the new controller See Convert a Nucleus 2450 Controller to a 246x Controller on page 104 Opens the New Screen Wizard for panels See Screens on page 108 Page 47 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration 5 4 Configuring Controllers A controller is a hardware platform that hosts one or more driver interfaces A driver is a software implementation of an interface over seria
234. n the correct alphabetical order select Screens sorted by alias from the drop down list at the top of the screen then re select Screens sorted by name Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 110 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 4 2 1 6 4 3 www snellgroup com Design Mode Screen Alias The screen alias is a number attributed to a screen to allow the screen to be referenced by that number This is particularly useful when a screen is linked by another screen If the alias number is used then any subsequent changes to the screen name will not inadvertently break the link between the screens By default all screens have an alias of zero no alias A zero alias is not indicated on the display To add an alias 1 Right click on a screen in the Screens Editor and click Edit Alias 2 Enter an alias number and click OK The alias number displays under the screen name in the Screens Editor Screen Templates Several screen templates are included with Workbench By default panel templates are located in the Workbench installation folder under Workbench ScreenstHardware Panels Workbench ScreensWistek Screens are also made available to customers who have purchased Snell products such as hardware control panels and modular screens These screen templates can be imported to Workbench greatly reducing the amount of time required to build screens Screens can also be found through the Snell Web site To import a screen temp
235. n this document without prior notice Contact Details Customer Support United Kingdom HQ 44 0 118 921 4214 tel 44 0 118 921 4268 fax customersupport snellgroup com Regional Support Contacts Snell USA 1 818 556 2616 tel 1 818 556 2626 fax support us snellgroup com Snell Spain 34 91 446 23 07 tel 34 91 446 17 74 fax support spain snellgroup com Snell Asia Pacific 852 2356 1660 tel 852 2575 1690 fax support hkOsnellgroup com Snell Russia 7 499 248 3443 tel 7 499 248 1104 fax support russia snellgroup com Snell Germany 49 0 6122 98 43 0 tel 49 0 6122 98 43 44 fax support germany snellgroup com Snell France 33 1 41 95 30 50 tel 33 1 41 95 30 51 fax support france snellgroup com Snell India 91 124 462 6000 tel 91 124 437 5888 fax support india snellgroup com Snell China 86 10 6515 6158 tel 86 10 6515 5659 fax support china snellgroup com For further details of our Regional Customer Support Offices please visit the Snell web site and navigate to Support Customer Support Contacts http www snellgroup com support customer support customer support Customers with a support contract should call their personalized number which can be found in their contract and be ready to provide their contract number and details O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Contents Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Introduction 0 0
236. nations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 4 bus XY 32 sources to 4 destinations protect and panel lock Split BPX 16 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock BPX 32 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 6706 Split XY 24 sources to 24 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 32x16 XY 32 sources to 16 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 4 bus XY 48 sources to 4 destinations protect and panel lock Split BPX 24 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock BPX 48 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 6707 XY 16 sources to 16 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock Split BPX 16 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 6708 XY 24 sources to 12 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 6709 4 bus XY 16 sources to 4 destinations protect and panel lock Split XY 8 sources to 8 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock Split BPX 8 sources to 1 destination x 2 with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock BPX 16 sources to 1 destination with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 6736 and 36x18 X Y 36 sources to 18 destinations with 4 level buttons 6028000 protect and panel lock 36x36 X Y 36 sources to 36 destinations with 4 level buttons protect and panel lock 72 BPX 72 sources to 1 destin
237. nccnnnnccnnnncnnnnns 241 Status ACUVI cantadas 46 CNeCKSUM secarconionicnosn canta cms 45 CONNECTION c oocconcccnccnnccnnncnnncnoncnnnannnos 45 Controler EE 45 PAM eg 46 Stereo Mode 165 Swap CGontrollers 99 System Architecture oooooccccnccccccccccommmmmo 136 Devices Types cccooocccnccnncccnonnoncnnnnos 137 TO Destaco ocios 136 T Taghames 55 IEN 145 IR e 179 Tie Lines Device 0 0 eee eceeececeeeeeeseeeeeseeees 90 Toolbar Architecture 136 Design Mode coccccccnccccnccccnononcnnnnnnos 106 S 129 Toolbox Design Mode coccccccnccccnccccncnoncnnnnnnos 115 UI eee enone ee dedos 129 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com U UMD Device 92 UMD Engine Device 93 Bu 91 184 185 Users Ae He e 37 A 36 Sie 38 V Version 46 W Window Kee ll E 33 Wizards Auto Configure 0eeeeeeee 71 171 Hardware Panels cccseseeeseseeeee 82 Workbench 9 Worked Examples See EXaMples eenean 143 Page 251 Index 2013 Snell Limited
238. nd Dest to 32 From the Port drop down list select COM2 Click Apply Page 60 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Example 3 Two Matrices Each With One Level Mapped to One Router In this example video and audio are separated into two matrices each with one level The starting destination of each level starts at one b ut the matrix ports will be setup to run consecutively and also remove any unused audio destinations See Fig 57 Level 1 Matrix 1 Start Dest 1 Video End Dest 1292 Dest Offset 0 Level 1 Matrix 2 Start Dest 1 Audio End Dest 16848 Dest Offset 2000 Fig 57 Matrix Ports Example 3 Controller To create the Matrix Ports for this example 1 Select Matrix 1 Select Level 1 Video and add a Matrix Port Select the port in the Matrix Ports list Set the Start Dest to 1 and set the End Dest to 1292 From the Port drop down list select COM3 Click Apply Select Matrix 2 Select Level 1 Audio and add a Matrix Port Select the port in the Matrix Ports list e A Sp A p ZS Set the Start Dest to 1 and set the End Dest to 16848 and set the Dest Offset to 2000 Qo From the Port drop down list select COM4 Click Apply 9 From the Port drop down list select COM1 Click Apply Example 4 Source Offsets A source offset can also be configured in the port record This is used when two levels are configured on a single router as see Fig
239. nd of the shortcut where X is a time out value in milliseconds If the time out value is already present increase the time out value 3 Click OK Page 97 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Important Issue 1 Rev 4 9 9 3 9 9 4 5 9 5 www snellgroup com Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration files may be exported or imported either singly or all at the same time to a file Individual files are stored as DCCP files and all files are stored as zip files Configurations should be backed up before editing or deleting a controller For a full backup use SQL Management Studio see Appendix F Reset This is the equivalent of pressing the Reset button on the front of the controller For a 2450 controller it is necessary to reset the controller after pushing or pulling a configuration Dual Redundancy Dual redundancy only applies to hardware controllers Both controllers must be connected to the network Dual redundancy is a method of pairing controllers so that in the event of a failure of one controller the other will immediately take over operations lt also provides a way of testing any changes without interrupting operations by pushing a new configuration to the Standby controller test the changes and either revert to a previous state or update the Active controller Any two hardware controllers of the same type can be paired The configuration information is not shared between controllers To mak
240. ndow displays To add a brush 1 Type its name in the Brush Name column The name must be exactly the same as it is in the brush repository 2 To help with entering the name click the Brush Repository button and copy the name from the repository 3 Paste the name in the Brush Name column The tabs along the bottom make it possible to select the character format Adding a Brush Name to one format adds it to all corresponding formats In Design mode set the group behaviors and button behavior see Table 20 Group behavior Button behavior Icon checkbox Router BPX BPX Show Source Dest Icon l Source Show Source Icon Router Dial up SC SE Destination Show Destination Icon Source Show Source Icon Router XY Destination Show Destination Icon Table 20 Group and Button Behaviors in Design Mode to Show Icons 5 5 6 Hardware Config When configuring a Nucleus 2450 controller there is an additional Hardware Config tab The settings on this tab provide additional data required by the Nucleus controller see Fig 64 Fa Controller Configuration _ Devices Routers Hardware Config Generic Nucleus Controlled De Basic Configuration Auto Configuration Reference TGeneralReferenceControl 3 Auto Configure Auto Configure Video Mp Advanced Configuration Rkf O lyj Edit Inputs Edit Outputs Edit Module Configurations Edit Module IDs
241. ne and six physical input sources If the auto configure option is used the logical sources are automatically set up To manually configure logical sources 1 Inthe Number of Sources type the required number of logical sources and then click Apply The specified number of logical sources are added to the table For each logical source select the signal type from the drop down list and then type the physical sources that are comprised by the logical source in the Phy 1 to Phy 6 fields Continue adding the logical sources in this manner until complete or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 2 Click Apply or OK Logical Destinations e Click Edit Logical Destinations to specify the logical destinations In instances where a signal that comprises more than one physical destination such as the left and right channels of a stereo pair logical destinations are used to identify that they should be routed together Logical destinations can be made up of between one and six physical outputs If the auto configure option is used the logical destinations are automatically set up To manually configure logical destinations 1 Inthe Number of Destinations text field type the required number of logical destinations and then click Apply The specified number of logical destinations is added to the table 2 For each logical destination select the signal type from the drop down list and then enter the physical outputs that
242. new panel is labeled Panel1 Panel2 and so on Source Sequence Set For XY dial up and multi bus panels New Sequence sets are labeled Sequence Sequence4 and so on Destination Sequence Set For XY dial up panels only To add a new panel through the wizard 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 Either select a screen from the list or click the button to browse to an existing saved screen Type a name for the panel Click the Create Screen and Edit Panel button The wizard displays in Design mode with the selected screen Page 82 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration 5 6 1 3 Hardware Panels Configuration Editor In the Configuration window the Hardware Panels Configuration Editor is for configuring the number of panels keypads sequence sets and communication ports e Panel Config a Hardware Panels Configuration Editor o m Panel Config Keypad Config Sequence Config Port Config Number of Panels 1 Fig 73 Panels Configuration Editor Comms Type Serial OK Cancel Apply These settings configure the number of physical control panels in the system Table 22 lists the Panel Config options Column Number of Panels Name Comms Type Port Address ID Description To specify the number of panels in the system enter the number of panels and then click Apply For each panel a
243. ng and SNMP details CONE Lg gt lt Adapter gt lt Number gt 0 lt Number gt lt DHCP gt false lt DHCP gt lt Address gt 10 1 0 10 lt Address gt lt Port gt 2007 lt Port gt lt SubNetMask gt 255 255 254 0 lt SubNetMask gt lt DefaultGateway gt 0 0 0 0 lt DefaultGateway gt lt Adapter gt lt IP gt lt RollCall gt lt Enabled gt false lt Enabled gt lt StartupDelay gt 5 lt StartupDelay gt lt SharePort gt 2050 lt SharePort gt lt BridgePort gt 2600 lt BridgePort gt lt BridgeRemoteAddress gt 128 1 1 1 lt BridgeRemoteAddress gt lt BridgeAutoConnect gt false lt BridgeAutoConnect gt lt Name gt Router lt Name gt lt Informationl gt Infol lt Intormationl gt lt Information2 gt Info2 lt Information2 gt lt NetNibbles gt 1000 lt NetNibbles gt lt UseLongNames gt false lt UseLongNames gt lt ROLICaLi gt lt SNMP gt lt Enabled gt true lt Enabled gt lt Contact gt Snell Employee lt Contact gt lt Location gt Test Lab lt Location gt lt SysName gt Test System lt SysName gt lt EnableSnellTraps gt true lt EnableSnellTraps gt lt DisablelnitialNotify gt true lt DisablelnitialNotify gt lt TrapManagers gt lt Address gt 172 31 7 133 lt Address gt up to 10 addresses lt Address gt 172 31 7 134 lt Address gt for trap managers lt Address gt 172 31 7 135 lt Address gt may be configured lt TrapManagers gt lt CommunityGetNames gt lt Name gt getonly lt Name gt lt Com
244. nitored using a terminal emulator configured to 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Logging to the console can cause problems on the controller when setting multiple crosspoints This is because crosspoint log messages are quite large so setting multiple crosspoints results in the output queue filling up which causes the Nucleus controller to stall waiting for space in the queue This was addressed in release 1 1 7 Workbench V3 10 by restricting log messages sent to the console to be warning level 4 or above DCCP 265 Earlier versions should either not enable logging to the console or manually set the Level parameter to 4 COM1 is not available externally to Sirius 800 routers e Level Minimum level of messages to log 0 6 Setting to zero means every log event is recorded The level numbers correspond to the following 0 Debug 1 Trace 2 Verbose 3 Information 4 Warning 5 Error 6 Fatal error e Address IP address to send log messages to UDP logging e Port IP port to send log messages on UDP logging UDP logging can cause a problem if the log client is not switched on If logging is enabled and configured to an IP address of a PC which is not switched on each time a log message is sent the controller attempts to locate the device using an ARP message This can cause a delay setting crosspoints if the logging level is set so that a log message Is sent every time a crosspoint is set To preven
245. nitoring is enabled for This is the first input that is routed to the output port listed above for monitoring purposes This value must be a valid input port on the router Page 198 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 B 2 6 www snellgroup com Controllers Reference PyxisVideolnputMonitoring Lastinput 17 ReadTime 400 SignalPresentFromLocked true RollCall Operation This entry specifies the last input port on the router that input signal monitoring is enabled for This is the last input that is routed to the output port listed above for monitoring purposes This value must be a valid input port on the router The video input monitoring algorithm continually cycles through all inputs between in Firstinput and LastInput values inclusive This entry specifies the time in milliseconds that each input is sampled for before switching to the next input This time must be sufficient to enable the crosspoint to switch and the signal to lock The recommended minimum time for this is 400 The time it takes the SNMP interface to recognise a loss of input signal is no greater than this value multiplied by the number of sources being monitored For example for 17 sources and a ReadTime of 400 it would take SNMP no longer than 17 x 400 6800ms 6 8s This entry specifies whether the SNMP input signal presence value should be set when the signal is locked It is recommended this is always set to true If it is set to fa
246. nment and Brightness 0 Minimum 8 Maximum If required select up to four tallies Dynamic UMDs can be configured to follow tie lines See Configure Dynamic UMDs on page 184 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 92 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 7 8 UMD Engine Device The UMD Engine provides a mechanism to automatically update the text displayed on the UMDs with the destinations source name in the tie line tally table To connect to the Tielines engines and the UMD drivers configure the UMD Engine to include at least one Tielines engine see section 5 7 6 and one UMD driver see section 5 7 7 G UMD Engine Editor Tielines UMDDrivers 1 TielineEngines 1 TieLines Add UMD Driver Remove UMD Driver Add Tie Line Driver Remove Tie Line Driver Preferred Name Type UMD Driver Tieline Engine Group Name Matrix 1 Names d Export to CSV Import from CSV Fig 81 UMD Engine Editor y UMDDrivers 1 TielineEngines 1 lt NONE gt e lt NONE gt Remove selected UMD Mappings OK Cancel Apply To add a new UMD driver 1 Click the Add UMD Driver button and a new driver is added to the list Select the Driver from the drop down list 2 Click the Add Tie line Driver button and select the Tie line from the drop down list 3 Click the Add a new field button and a new entry is added to th
247. nputs are selected For example if video port 1 has audio addresses set to 1 16 video port 2 should have audio addresses set to 33 49 To setup multiple source sizes 1 SS 2 Y Click on Apply to Matrix at bottom of the screen Setup the audio sizes across all levels in the same way in steps 1 3 for setup of an individual audio source Check the Set Addresses checkbox Enter a starting Address ID Change the offset if necessary for example 4 for AES 16 for MADI Default is 32 Either click on the Set Visible Rows button to apply the settings to all rows as defined by the current filter or select rows using the CTRL and Shift keys in conjunction with the mouse in the normal manner and click on the Set Selected Matrix Rows button Page 74 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Destination Sizes As with sources destinations should also be setup for the size of output The setup method is identical to that of the source sizes Safe Sources A safe source Is required for each level on each matrix This default channel must be applied when there is no other audio routed to a destination track For example when a destination program set is larger than the source routed to it safe sources are used to fill the empty audio tracks Sa Audio Mapping Configuration Source Sizes Destination Sizes Safe Sources Mapped Programs Program Sets Source Assignment Destinati
248. ntrol Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs Pyxis AA 272x272 Stereo 64 MADI Ref1 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 272x272 Stereo actual router size is dependent on cards and rear connectors fitted to Pyxis frame All MADI Inputs and Outputs are exposed in the Logical to Physical port mapping tables as pairs so that they are controllable please refer to the Pyxis handbook Audio Port Numbering section for more details Pyxis Serial port configuration Port 1 Workbench COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 2 Workbench COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Aurora control Port 3 Workbench COM 5 Panel Protocol with a 6276 X Y configured for numerical control of all inputs and outputs on address 1 Reference 1 has been configured as the primary reference source for all inputs Page 207 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Routers Reference C 1 2 4 Pyxis AA 288x288 Mono Ref1 C 1 2 5 C 1 2 6 Dual 2450 Nucleus controller configured with independent IP address that controls a single level of routing up to 288x288 MONO actual router size
249. ntroller flash green the process is complete and the controller can be rebooted Remove the USB memory stick and press the Reset button to reboot the controller Page 200 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 3 2 1 Updating the Software in the Second Controller 1 Ifthe second controller remains Active press its Reset button see Fig 192 The Active and Standby controllers swap over 2 Repeat the procedure from step 2 on page 200 to step 7 on page 200 for the second controller Important Remove the USB memory stick before shutting the door on a router Leaving the USB memory stick in the controller will result in damage to the USB memory stick and the controller B 3 3 246x Controller LEDs UL USB Connector Reset Button Power OK 4 ASasasao d d Fig 192 246x Controller LEDs Table 47 Lists the Nucleus Controller LEDs LED Description Power OK Power OK e Green Power is connected and OK e Off Power is not connected or not OK Active Standby 1 e Flashes Green Active e Flashing Blue Standby Table 49 246x Controller LEDs Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 201 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference Issue 1 Rev 4 LED 6 7 Table 49 Description Master Slave e Green Master Controller e Blue Slave Controller Watchdog Status e Flashing Green Watchdog enabled and running e Flashing Orange
250. o 20 characters in length can be specified for set operations This is typically set to 1 The TrapManager variable is used to specify how many trap manager addresses are listed in the ini file using the TrapManagerAddrN variable Up to 10 trap manager addresses can be specified Any more than this is ignored This is typically set to 1 The TrapManagerAddrN variable is used to specify the IP address for trap managers The N should be replaced by the number of the trap manager 1 10 The CommunityGetNameN variable is used to specify 1 of the community strings used for get operations The N should be replaced by a unique digit either 1 or 2 The CommunitySetNameN variable is used to specify 1 of the community strings used for set operations The N should be replaced by a unique digit either 1 or 2 The EnableSnellTraps variable is used to specify whether traps are sent for changes to certain Snell specific variables If this is set to O MIBv2 system traps are sent but no Snell specific traps for example routed source change are sent The TrapMessageDelay variable specifies the number of milliseconds minimum that occurs between consecutive Snell trap messages For example if it is set to 10 there is a gap of at least 10ms between each Snell specific trap message that is sent The reason for this is that when large numbers of crosspoints are changed simultaneously for example a large number
251. o Processing The 246x controller on the router must first be configured See Configuring Controllers on page 48 The Main Menu screen provides access to the routing and processing screens Fig 160 Main Menu Ta an Vis SE P e DCH Main Menu af Video Output Video Audio Routing Video Input Audio Processing Processing Video Output Frame Sync Video Input Frame Sync Video with Audio Track Routing Audio Output Processing AES Audio Audio Routing Output Processing Audio Input Processing AES Audio Input Processing MADI MA O I Click on any of the boxes in the Main Menu to go to the appropriate screen Issue 1 Rev 4 Video Input Audio Processing apply delay gain mix channels and shuffle channels on the de embedded audio Video Input Frame Sync synchronize input video to a specified reference at a particular standard or add a delay Audio Input Processing AES apply gain and select stereo mode Audio Input Processing MADI apply gain and select stereo mode Video Routing XY routing of video Video with Audio Track Routing XY routing of video with routing of audio tracks onto the video for embedding Audio Routing XY routing of audio channels Video Output Audio Processing mix channels shuffle channels apply gain and delay on the audio prior to re embedding Video Output Frame Sync synchronize output video to a speci
252. o save the Salvo N mm FF bk Click OK to confirm and close the Salvo Editor To rename a salvo 1 Select the salvo in the Salvos list 2 Type a new name in the text box below it Alternatively in the Names Editor click on the Salvos tab select the salvo to change and then enter a new name To add a crosspoint into a salvo 1 Select a new destination and source combination 2 Click Add Entry 3 Click Apply to save changes To delete a crosspoint from a salvo 1 Select the crosspoint from the crosspoint list 2 Click Remove Selected Entries or press the delete key 3 Click Apply to save changes To export a salvo for future use 1 Click on the Export Salvo button 2 Navigate to the folder in which to save the salvo and click Save To import a salvo 1 Click on the Import Salvo button 2 Browse to where the salvo is saved and click Open Note A comma separated list containing salvo names and matrix level destination and source indexes can be created externally to Workbench and imported as a salvo Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 67 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 5 5 6 Icons Icons are only displayed in Run mode for soft panels Icons provide a way of visually grouping sources and destinations For example a picture of a server can represent all server sources Icons are not required but can help operators recognise key sources and destinations e Click Icons The Icons Editor wi
253. o with a 1 to 1 mapping so that the physical sources destinations match the logical sources destinations Auto Configure updates the ports and modules but leaves the logical to physical mapping unchanged This is often used for audio routers where the logical to physical can be used to configure the router as either stereo or mono lt is also useful if a custom logical to physical mapping has been configured on a video router and a reconfigure is required without changing this Advanced Configuration Input Ports If the auto configure option is used the number and type of ports are set automatically Any input ports that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownInput To manually configure physical input ports 1 Inthe Number of Ports text field type the number of physical input ports and then click Apply The specified number of ports is added to the table 2 For each input port select the input type from the drop down list Continue adding the input ports in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click Apply or OK Output Ports To specify or modify the number and types of physical output ports click Edit Outputs If the auto configure option is used the number and type of ports are automatically set up Any output ports that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownOutput To manually configure physical output ports 1 Inthe Nu
254. of traps can be sent in quick succession which can Cause unnecessary loading on the controller and management Station It is recommended that this variable is set to a value between 0 and 100 Note No traps are discarded as a result of this setting they are simply queued up and sent at the specified intervals The DisablelnitialNotify flag can be used to prevent the controller card from sending power on startup traps for each variable type that supports traps The reason for implementing this flag is that in a router with a large number of destinations 512 for example there are 5 trappable parameters per destination On startup this particular router would result in 2560 traps for the destination variables alone By setting this variable to 1 these initial traps are not sent but all subsequent ones are This is global setting that affects all Snell specific variables Page 195 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Example INI File The following is an example of the Network ini file NETWORK Forcel0M 1 PAddress 1 14 31 9111 SubNetMask 255 255 224 0 DefaultGateway 172 31 1 6 DNSAddress 0 0 0 0 UseDHCP 0 UseSNMP 0 DEBUG RTIPDiag 0 ROLLCALL Enable 0 StartupDelay 5 SharePort 2050 BridgePort 2600 BridgeRemoteAddress 128 1 1 1 BridgeAutoConnect 0 Name 2450 Informationl Infol Information2 Info2 NetNibbles 1000 UseLongNames 0 SNMP Contact Unknown Location Unkno
255. ol The Property Window displays information that is relevant to the selected control see Fig 106 Property Window e H Panel A Appearance Property Window e MA Colour Default darl Bru e iy a Behaviour ox Appearance i p i Property Window e Behaviour Hardware Panel Behaviou da ah BB Default blac Bru i R Combo Box Behaviour Border i Thickness Appearance dercher i Property Window z A Caption Line Up Background Default whi Bru Controller PyxisAnalogueAudio288x2 Edit Keypad 1 6276XY El Waat Bl one MD Default blac Bru ighlight A Appearance Panel 1 6276XY Show Highlig Thumb Fill Default ligh Bru E Configure Text wrap Overflow Behaviour i m gel Behaviour Behaviour Passive OR D Panel Behaviour Specific ae per el Behaviour Passive H GL Panel T X 6276Panel A Interface BEE E elteren Group MainKeypad Position Panel Type Specific EE Wl Position Left 700 ae 160 Behaviour Behaviour Line Up Left 220 PS Auto Display Tally w Group MainKeypad Top 120 4 Sizing Display Source Assoc Name E EN ae Position A Sizing bei GPI Panel Loc es Go Ge Height 30 Width 150 Log Takes IE e SS Top 100 Width 150 Text Manipulation Mask Levels With Dest E ue Seana Master Panel EN amp Sizing 4 Tex
256. olid colors use the standard RGB color model Colors are created by mixing amounts of Red Green and Blue see Fig 115 Colour Silver ll Li LI Lu Fig 115 Solid Color Editor Set each mixing color by either using the slider or by directly entering a value from O to 255 When RGB 0 the color is black and when RGB 255 the color is white The bottom slider sets the opacity level With a value of 255 the color is opaque with a value of O the color is transparent 6 13 4 Linear and Radial Gradient A Gradient fades one color into another There are three attributes e A start color e A finish color e An offset Sets the start position of the gradient from the edge of the brush Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 126 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode Sa a i a Nm Nm IW un un un un un un Nm un un Fig 116 Gradient Editor The default setting for the gradient is fade from one color to another It is possible to set up multiple fades by clicking the Add button It is also possible to remove a fade by selecting it and clicking Remove 6 13 5 Images An image is stored in the Brush Repository and can be selected as a brush in the same way as choosing a color Add the image to the Image Library before using it as a brush Sg anh ee Dest Protect Dest Protect Dest Protect Dest Protect Indicator eg on ox Dest Protect Dest Protect Dest Protect Dest Protect
257. ollers 44 52 2 NetWOrKS siero decd maes he des band dd a e ab ca e ie bis a ad 44 9 2 3 Gontroller SAUS sce ste ceenddaeauceoadddewdehne da BES Ha RR EER 45 DOME cts rosa ao ae reia a e a io e te pio A 46 5 4 Configuring Controllers 0 0 0 cc eee eee eee 48 5 4 1 Add a New GController eee eee eee 48 5 4 2 Edit Controller Configuration 0 0 0 0 ccc ee ees 51 5 5 Configuring a Router 1 ee eee teens 52 5 5 1 Router Configuration 0 0 0 eee ene 53 5 5 2 INGINGS ke au ican E bos ak Wane He ee sodio hae eo eee Ee ee ea 53 5 5 3 ASSOCIQUONS ecs ota Saud wed aga ede seemed Ee a e dow es 55 5 5 4 Port Configuratii sai ss cris pre e a el a we be amp eae 56 5 5 5 Advanced Configuration 0 0 0 cc eee ees 62 5 5 6 Hardware CGonfg eee eee eee ees 68 5 5 7 Local Router Hardware 72 5 6 Configuring Panel 81 e GNC CVC se stes mais pase ideados ome EES 81 5 7 Configuring Additional Devices 2 2 0 cc eee 85 5 7 1 Add a New Device to the Controller cee eee 85 5 7 2 Available Devices ee ee ee eee 87 ESA e e EE oe bene ook eae ous oe ees A 88 5 7 4 FieldStore Device eee ee ee eee 89 57o OFI DEVICE fuera oe eae ee bm eee eee eee see deere ee bee eS 90 5 7 6 Tielines DEVICE A on ade eno oe Soe a RE we eee ee Rw we eo 90 0 77 UMD EE necesa ee E aa a Ok Shee oe e MER 92 5 7 8 UMD Engine Device 0 ee eens 93
258. om list Similarly removing a device from a drawing does not delete that device from the list The Device tab shows all the available devices Multiple devices can be placed on a single drawing and a device can be placed on multiple drawings To add a new device 1 2 3 4 Select the Device tab bottom right of the window Right click and select Add New Device The Create Device wizard displays Type a unique name for the device and click Next Select whether to Create a new device based on a device type a Select the Device type from the drop down list Create a new device based on a router matrix a Select the Controller from the drop down list b Select the Matrix from the drop down list Click OK The new device is added to the list of devices see Fig 128 Fig 128 Devices List Ei Ka Devices n Vistek 6406 8 5 1 Add a Device to a Drawing To add a device to a drawing 1 SS St SS Select the Drawings tab bottom right of the window Double click on the required drawing On the toolbar click the 4 button and the button Select the Device tab bottom right of the window Double click on the device to be added Drag and place the device on the drawing see Fig 129 Fig 129 Example Device Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 139 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com System Architecture 8 5 2 Device Properties 8 6 8 6 1 8 6 2 Issue 1 Re
259. om the drop down list Select the reference rate for audio from the drop down list SN i PA 2 Click OK Derived references are changed online using the relevant run screens S800 databases only 5 6 Configuring Panels 5 6 1 Panel Device A Panel Device relates to a physical hardware device for example a control panel Control panels are configured for use with the router to which they are connected and then setup using on screen hardware panel templates There are two areas in Workbench that are relevant to Hardware Panels e Configuration A port on a router controller can be configured to communicate with Panel Devices When configuring a Hardware Panel set a router COM port to ptMultiDropFullDuplex e Design The functionality of the Hardware Panels are set in the design mode Workbench provides several screen files each of which is a template for a particular type of panel These screen files can be imported to Workbench designer so that panels and keypads can be easily configured For paired controllers a new panel can only be created for the primary controller There are several ways to create a hardware panel e Configure a router controller to be a panel device then create the panel through the panels wizard e Select one of the pre defined panels in design mode and link it to a router controller e Create a panel in design mode and link it to a router controller By default Run Mode is disabled for
260. on Assignment Level Safe Sources A Default Signal should be assigned to every level to carry a tone or silence VP 0001 y Matrix 1 gt M1 L2 Ca Source Channel Matrix 1 gt M1 L3 Ca Source Channel Matrix 1 gt M1 L4 3 Source Channel k This level requires a safe channel on one of its sources to be selected for Tone or Silence Cancel Fig 69 Safe Sources 1 Select a Source from the drop down box 2 Select a Channel from the source to select a default audio signal for example a tone or silence Levels that do not have a safe source attributed to them display Ca next to the level name indicating that a safe source needs to be setup for that level Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 75 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration Mapped Programs Mapped Programs are a groups of contiguous channels that are routed together when a source and destination in a mapped program are routed Mapped Programs Is used to configure the names that display in the track routing screen Assignments are setup in the Program Sets tab See Program Sets on page 77 d 6 d Source Sizes Destination Sizes Safe Sources Mapped Programs Program Sets Source Assignenent Destination Assignment All Mapped Programs Mapped Program Properties vm Standard Stereo E veo Description eer _ Enable Track Ordering ed Mapped Program Tracks
261. onnnnnnnnnnos 78 Configuration cccccccccccccnoccononnnnnnnns 73 KE 163 Destination Assignment 78 Destination SIZES cece eee 75 Gi EE 164 Mapped Programs cooccccccccnnnccccnccnnnno 76 Mapping cccccconocnnnccnnccnnnnnoncnnnnnoninnnnnnns 73 Vill re ME 164 Processing noennesnenennnennnnneennnne 162 Program CGeis 77 Re EE 170 ROUTING cccccccconccnncnnncnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 168 Safe SOULCE wrsicdencctcucondersneaecenoccedensed 15 O A is 163 Source Aesionmment 78 SOUICO SIZES iovesscnenscnsancdcchacsenooaeweceans 73 Auto Calculate Destination Aesocaions 53 Source Associations sees 53 Auto Configure ooocconccccncccncnnncccconos 71 171 AUO E 124 Assign Dial up Keypad 0 154 Key Sequence ocococccccccnncococccnnnnnnos 124 Auto Changeover 99 B Backup Configuration ccccccccccccoconccnnnnnnnnno 98 Behavior CONTO EE 116 231 2 EEN 120 130 A 114 BPX Soft Panel 148 a 125 CIONEe EE 126 e e EE 126 SINN 126 Gracdient nrnna 126 e A 127 Page 248 Index C Centra Controller ooooocccocccnccnnnccnncnnncnnncnnno 48 Checksum MS ias 45 Configuration A 98 Controller oooocoocccocccnccnnncnnncnoncnnncnnno 48 Database 9 UE E EEA 197 203 ROUTE te ps iia 52 Configuration Men 46 Configure Devices A 85 Connection StAtUs cocccoocccnncnnnnccnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnnncnnns 45 Controller 2300 RE 48 187 A 48 85 A E EOS 200 Add a New Controller ee 48 A 48 CGonfguraio
262. ons Edit Module IDs Edit Logical Destinations Edit Logical Sources Close The 246x controller can be fitted to the Sirius 800 range of Routers If Workbench is not connected to the 246x controller card the auto configuration option cannot be used In this case these settings can either be entered manually or copy and paste the configuration from a spreadsheet 5 5 7 1 Reference Control Click the Reference drop down list and select a reference control type If controlling a Cygnus router set it to TCygnusReferenceControl for anything else set it to TGeneralReferenceControl 5 5 7 2 Video Configuration The auto configure option is used to configure the settings for the 246x controller To auto configure the settings Connect to the controller and click the Auto Configure Video button Workbench configures these settings based on the detected physical inputs outputs and modules These read back from the matrix the ports and modules installed and update the configure port and modules Auto Configure Video populates the logical to physical source and destination tables It configures them to all be of type video with a 1 to 1 mapping so that the physical sources destinations match the logical sources destinations Page 72 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 5 7 3 Audio Configuration and Mapping For any logical input and output that is required to h
263. ontroller Configuration screen add the UMDEngineDevice to the controller configuration for Controller Configuration Controller 1 a Controller 1 TP Address 1200 57 Pare 23007 Available Devices MOUDevice MultiViewerDevice LUMDEngineDevice PanelDence SatellteDlevice 5SNMPGen Device Source ue Lav ioe TestQevice TielinesDevice UMD Device VideoRlayoutDevice Shaw Foubng Leer ez Lire Fig 187 Controller Configuration Screen 3 Inthe UMD Engine Editor click the Add UMD Driver button and a new driver is added to the list Select the Driver from the drop down list 4 Click the Add Tie line Driver button and select the Tie line from the drop down list 5 Click the Add a new field button and a new entry is added to the list Configure the engine as required Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 184 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples G UMD Engine Editor Tielines UMDDrivers 1 TielineEngines 1 TieLines Add UMD Driver Remove UMD Driver Add Tie Line Driver Remove Tie Line Driver Preferred Name Type UMD Driver Tieline Engine Group Name Matrix 1 Names uMDDrivers 1 TielineEngines 1 lt NONE gt e lt NONE gt d d Export to csy Import from CSV Remove selected UMD Mappings OK Cancel Apply Fig 188 UMD Engine Editor Controller 2 Tie line
264. or DCCP_CONNECTION_ERROR A O Display Name WG Too High Active and not Acknowledged a e z x O Display Name YG Too High Latched vd Display Name YG Too High Not Active or Latched Bei O Display Name Video Gain Too High with Enable _5 Fig 124 Rules Service To select which rules are in operation select or clear the checkboxes for the Rule or Folder The rules in operation can also be set from the Rules Service See Rules Editor on page 128 A folder name can be specified on the command line for the rules service to force it to load only children of that folder For example RulesService exe folder Router Flip Flop The active state of rules is set via the rules editor as well as via the Rules Service GUI If two or more Rules set a value in the same DCCP destination and there is a conflict the value is set by the last Rule in the list that attempts to set a value 7 8 1 Rules Status The folders and rules show different colors depending on the status of the rules Table 37 lists the possible states Icon Description Rule Not Firing The rule is running but the conditions have not been met O That is the conditions of the Rule are FALSE O Rule Firing That is the conditions of the Rule are TRUE O One or more Rules within a folder are firing D Error one or more Rules have an error Table 37 Rules Status Page 135 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com System
265. ort b E trnutPorts 31 T naloamedudioTrnt Field Name OID Ty 2 StatussignalPresent 21 1 5 122 Boolear UIntLe Ulmti6 Ulnt16 UIntle UIntLe Unkle UIntle UIntLe Unkle UIntle StatusAudioAttenuation 2115 13 StatusGainStep 211 5 14 StatusLineUpValue 2 1 1 5 1 5 StatusNonAudioDetect 2 1 1 5 1 6 StatusSynciInputDetect up ia Bea StatusSyncErrorDetect 2 1 1 5 1 8 Status5RCAutoMode 2 1 1 5 1 9 Status5RCinCircuit 2 1 1 5 1 10 ControlMode 2 1 1 5 1 11 ControlAudioAttenuation 2115112 IN V Device Explorer Property Window Screens Editor Panel Templates Fig 107 Device Explorer CO OO OO OO OO OH DCCP Behavior All controls that have the option for DCCP behaviors depending on the Group behavior can access the controller s configuration parameter Behaviour Specific Gi Choose Decp Field 2 Behaviour r Gei LoggingController TT Peen Lei Version Y Go Version a J Devices E Ge RouterContraller E EA Devices 1 FieldStoreDevice Did E As Matrices g As Fields E Le Matrices 1 a m Fields 1 F Levels 2 Name Property H Sourcessocs Gei Timestamp E Gi SourceAsss CG StringValue D Ge SourceAsse Gei DoubleValue Geet en Gei UseLastRunviewChanges Gi Fields 2 Gi Fields 3 Gi Pele al Gi Fields 5 8 Fields 6 Gei Fields 7 Gi Fields a 1 1 6 1 1 2 Fig 108 List Box Array Selection Page 120 2013 Snell Limited Workbench 6 10
266. orts La MonitorRouting Aa ModuleConfigurations Aa ModulelDs lt amp ReferenceControl GeneralReferenceControl Lei BaseReference e ControlDefaultCtriAudioRate Audio48K e ControlAudioRefForControl True Ce ControlPrefVideoRefForControl 0 oe ControlVideoRefForControl True La InstalledinputPorts ba InstalledOutputPorts La InstalledModulelDs OK Cancel Apply Fig 169 Audio Reference Configuration Workbench 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 170 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com ControlAudioRefForControl ControlVideoRefForControl ControlPrefVideoRefForControl ControlDefaultCtrlAudioRate Worked Examples The fields for configuring the reference control are Controls whether the reference is set to that of the incoming AES reference True default or not False If the incoming AES reference is invalid or not present the reference is set to free run at the ControlDefaultCtrlAudioRate Controls whether the reference is set to that of the incoming video reference True default or not False If the incoming video reference is invalid or not present the reference is set to free run at the ControlDefaultCtrlAudioRate Sets which video reference is used O video reference 1 1 video reference 2 and so on Defines the default audio rate for when a free running reference is set Valid rates are 32k 44 1k 48k 88 2k 96k
267. orts text field type the number of physical input ports and then click Apply The specified number of ports is added to the table 2 For each input port select the input type from the drop down list Continue adding the input ports in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click OK Page 78 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration Output Ports e To specify or modify the number and types of physical output ports click Edit Outputs If the auto configure option is used the number and type of ports are automatically set up Any output ports that are not present or not recognized are identified as TUnknownOutput To manually configure physical output ports 1 Inthe Number of Ports text field enter the number of physical output ports and then click Apply The specified number of ports is added to the table 2 For each output port select the output type from the drop down list Continue adding the output ports in this manner until complete Or use the copy and paste function to complete the entries 3 Click OK Module Configurations The term module refers to the card in a router on which the physical inputs and outputs are situated For module configurations for each type of router see Routers Reference on page 206 If the auto configuration option is used the number and types of module configurations are automatically set Any modul
268. ottom left of the panel during dragging A Tab control groups controls onto separate pages To add a tab page right click on the edge of the tab control and select Add Tab Page All controls added to the tab page are only visible when the tab page is selected To remove a tab page right click and select Remove Tab Page Groups Each tab page can be assigned to a different Group see section 6 6 All controls added to a tab page are automatically assigned to the same Group Tab Headers In run mode it is possible to either show the tab headers or create separate buttons to select each tab page Soft Panels only A Titled Box control is simply a black border that is placed around controls to show a _ visual grouping of controls with an editable title to describe the contents Fig 100 Layout Panel Controls 6 7 2 Controls If the Behavior of a control is set to DCCP the value is set in the relevant property on the controller All controls can tally back values too in the form of text slider button colors Dr i d Edit Button Button Checkbox Combo Box Image Line List Box Edit Label AN Edit Button Sets a DCCP text value Only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial up Groups Button Performs a single action generally setting a single value For example a BPX 4 button play on a video server setting a single value to video gain Mm CheckBox A checkbox can have a state of True
269. oups of controls each of which can be toggled open or closed by clicking on the Group Heading Fig 99 The Toolbox displays at the bottom of the screen when in edit mode The available list of behaviors on a control depends on the type of controller selected in the group and the behavior for the group it is in For example a button can be a destination for a router or a play button for video server Edit the position size style and behaviors of the tools using the Properties Window See Property Window on page 119 Di Edit Button EI S u Button CheckBox d Slider I Combo Box LI Image Composite Slider L EB Line List Box Edit Fig 99 Toolbox Tabs and Controls Meters and Charts h a Group Headings Page 115 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode 6 7 1 Layout e Tit Titled Box rt Tab Contral a Panel A panel is a container for controls such as buttons tallies and so on A screen must have at least one panel The behavior can be either Soft Panel or Hardware Panel Panels can be imported from and exported to a template or added through the Add Panel Wizard When a panel is placed on a screen it an be repositioned by clicking and dragging The current position displays numerically at the b
270. r the Source Queue Group Web Browser The Web Browser control is valid for all Groups Bar Meter The Bar Meter control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups Line Graph The Line Graph control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups Round Gauge The Round Gauge control is only valid as DCCP behavior for the Generic and Generic Dial Up Groups Device Selector This Device Selector control is only valid as Block Select behavior for the Mimic Group Mimic Box The Mimic Box control is only valid as a Mimic Forward Chain and Mimic Backward Chain behaviors for the Mimic Group Device Chain Box The Device Chain control is only valid as a Device Chain behavior for the Device Chain Group Device Selector This Device Selector control is only valid as Device Selector behavior for the Device Chain Group Page 240 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Appendix F Databases F 1 Ei Issue 1 Rev 4 SQL Server Management Studio Restore a Database Databases Before restoring a database ensure that the current database has been backed up first The Workbench CD contains several optional example databases If the example databases are installed they are installed in the Workbench installation folder Workbench Databases To install a new database 1 Make sure Workbench is not active 2 If necessary copy bak file to
271. red destination The source routed toggles between the reference source and the source to be aligned e Line up of sources on a destination is cancelled by pressing the LINE UP button again This cancels line up altogether on the control device e The source being aligned is returned as the source routed to the destination being used and also the LED associated with the LINE UP button is extinguished e Pressing another TAKE button on the same panel causes the original source to be routed to the previous destination and then start the line up sequence on the new destination All control devices power up with line up inactive Next and Previous Each time the NEXT or PREVIOUS button is pressed the source or destination association number selected depending on the active keypad is increased or decreased The panel displays are updated accordingly These functions only work on 6276 and 6277 panels Alt dest ALT DEST allows a 6277 multi destination panel to access more destinations than are usually configured that is one per status display When pressed the panel changes control to the alternate set of assigned destination associations configured in the database When the LED to the left of the ALT DEST button is illuminated the panel is then controlling the second set of destination associations assigned to the panel This function must use a special function button Dest ident The DEST IDENT button is used to identify the destin
272. rent physical sources and destinations on the frame Source Destination Non contiguous source and destination numbering on one level numbering and The mapping capabilities of Workbench makes expansion expansion possible without moving existing modules Number of controllable Unlimited levels Level sizes There is a limit for the physical port mapping input ports and output ports with the router expansion bus See the appropriate router manual for the number of input and output ports available Expansion with serial ports does not have this limitation Router levels can be configured to any size within the limits of the protocol when slaved via SW P 02 or SW P 08 out Audio capability Up to 32 channels of Mono Stereo or Dolby grouped routing and processing on a per channel basis See compatible routers for details of audio capabilities Table 48 246x Controller Features B 3 2 246x Firmware Update 1 Locate the Standby 246x controller see Fig 192 for LED positions LED 1 Standby Flashing Blue Active Flashing Green Check that the LED confirms the controller is in Standby Insert the USB memory stick in the USB connector on the front of Standby controller see Fig 192 For details of the contents of the USB memory stick see the relevant router manual Press the Reset button see Fig 192 The controller will reboot and the new software will be copied to the controller When all of the LEDs on the co
273. rn the status response 5 message or whatever response is returned from the router The default is YES Setting this to NO means that status response 1 to 4 are returned depending on what router the SC12 is connected to See SW P 02 for which routers return which responses This is intended for use with existing equipment that does not support the status response 5 message Used to switch on or off unsolicited connects on the TCP connection When set to false a connected messages are only sent on a TCP port in response to a connect on that TCP port When set to true it behaves more like the serial ports in that whenever a crosspoint is set a connected is sent on all open TCP connections even if not set by a command on that port for example a panel The default true Enables the multi cast address used for connecteds Default true Enables the multi cast address used for status 5 changes Default true This entry specifies which output on the router is used for checking the signal lock on the inputs Each input is routed to this output in turn and if the output obtains a signal lock then the input is deemed to have a valid input signal This feature enables input signal presence monitoring without dedicated hardware This value must be a valid and unused output port on the router To disable the Video Input monitoring feature completely set this value to 0 This entry specifies the first input port on the router that input signal mo
274. roller Config button 2 From the Devices tab check the checkbox for a MultiViewerDevice 3 Open the Generic tab and click the Edit Controller button to open the Generic Editor xa Generic Configuration Editor userController 3 4 amp Controller 127 0 0 020 2007 Gei Generallnto ee Configurationltems Ge LaggingSettings Gei Version 4 As Devices 7 Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice 7 Devices 2 RouterDevice 7 Devices 3 PanelDevice d ai Devices 4 Muli viewer Device Gei Generallnto d ai Comms IP Geh IPAddress 127 0 0 1 Port 0 As Captions As Lues As Rooms d 2 Alarms Snell As InputAlarm Gei xX False Gei powerFailure False Gei powerFanFailure False Gei sbcHighTemp False Gei sbcFanOverload False OK Cancel Apply Fig 159 MultiViewer Configuration Under Devices open the MultiViewerDevice branch Set the Comms type either IP or Serial Set the Alarms type a oe oO S Define all other alarm settings in the MultiViewer branch as required Page 160 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 10 Audio and Video Routing and Processing Standard screens have been included for the provision of routing and processing video with embedded audio and discrete audio signals These screens can be adapted or recreated in the normal manner as necessary for a particular router A valid license is required and must be installed for Audi
275. row is added to the editor The name of the panel Either Serial or IP Select the appropriate type from the drop down list If IP is selected the Address is updated automatically Unused panels should be set to Unassigned The port on which the controller communicates with the panel The default port number is 3010 The ports are defined from the Port Config tab Port Configuration on page 56 Note There is no internal mechanism to ensure that the specified COM port is not already in use Enter an address for each panel The address must match the address switches on a physical card An ID is automatically attributed when using the panels wizard If required change the ID of a panel The same ID may be attributed to more than one panel if required Table 22 Panel Configuration Settings Keypad Config These settings configure the number of keypads in the system The number of keypads required depends on the type of control panel and how the specific panels are used A single keypad can be used on more than one panel Table 23 lists the Keypad Config options Column Number of Keypads Name Description To specify the number of keypads in the system enter the required number and then click Apply The name of the keypad Table 23 Keypad Configuration Settings Page 83 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration A dial up keypad is configured such t
276. ryHelper DriversDirectory var 03 01 2012 6744 LogTools Startup DriversDirectory C Users Stuartche 2 Lni Coll Fig 34 Exit Screen 3 5 Exit Workbench Click the k zel button A dialog box prompting for confirmation displays Are you sure you wish to exit Click Yes to exit or No to cancel Fig 35 Exit Confirmation Screen e Click Yes to exit or No to return to Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 35 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Administration 4 Administration 4 1 Description Administration of Workbench how to add new users roles and permissions Users belong to groups based upon roles which are assigned permissions that support their operational needs For example access for all control operators or engineers may be grouped together e A Role defines the functions of a group of users e A User defines a system user belonging to one or more roles When Workbench is first installed there are two users see Table 5 User Password Roles admin admin Everyone Administrators user none required Everyone Users Administrators Table 5 Default Users 4 2 Users The Users tab is for adding and deleting users from the Workbench system It also lists the roles of each user Kei i Di d a Cal m 2 4s A Centra Workbench acon A Uer Roles Screen Permissions Controller Permissions Lodang Data Manegement Sequence Sets Identity User name adm Fawernrt
277. s and UMD Device 1 Add a second controller and configure it as a Tie Line device 2 Inthe Tie line Editor screen select a Router Controller 3 Click on the Add new tie line button and set the following information Column Description Name The name that identifies the Tie Line Auto Defines whether a tie line is used automatically or not Group This allocates tie lines to a specific group to ensure that routes are available in smaller sub sections For example if n operators must link to their local monitors there must be n 1 groups to make sure that each operator has a set number of available tie lines for their use regardless of how many tie lines the other operators are using Start Matrix The matrix on the router from which the signal originates Start Level The level from which the signal originates Start Dest The destination from which the signal originates End Matrix The matrix to which the signal is to be sent End Level The level to which the signal is to be sent End Source The source to which the signal is to be sent Table 43 Tie Lines Configuration 4 Click Apply to save the Tie Line configuration For UMDs the configuration can be left empty Select a router device and click the Synchronise Tie line tally table button 5 From the Devices tab in the Controller Configuration screen add the UMDDevice to the controller configuration 6 Inthe UMD Device Editor screen click the Add Group button A new
278. s can be added to a screen to monitor outputs The monitors work on a single matrix and single level Monitors are only available on Nucleus controllers A 7 1 Add Monitor Buttons to an XY Panel 1 Add a panel with an XY router group and Source and Destination buttons See XY Soft Panel on page 143 Add a new button and set the behavior to Monitor Set the Row property to the required monitor number according to the router connected Fig 155 Monitor Button Properties Button A Appearance Border Brush GMB Default black brush v Brushes Border Thickness 1 Caption Monitor 1 Colour Default light grey brush Brushes Show Highlight y Text wrap Overflow v Behaviour Specific Appearance Active colour E Default monitor background active X Brushes Behaviour Row ox Behaviour Behaviour Group 2450 D Repeat for up to three further buttons ensuring that the row is appropriately set for each monitor output If required add a text tally using the Monitor Tally behavior and setting the Row property to the appropriate monitor number A 7 2 Monitoring on an XY Panel 1 Issue 1 Rev 4 Click on a Monitor button The button lights denoting that monitor mode is active If the selected monitor is currently routed to a source or destination the relevant button will light Click on a Source or Destination button The
279. s serially using general switcher protocol and the external controller cannot tell where in the frame it is sending the messages it is possible for one crosspoint to go on one frame and the second on the next if the serial commands straddled a frame By configuring a Set Delay of two milliseconds the time to send the second crosspoint both crosspoints will have been received when they are set That way both crosspoints will go on the same frame Configure the action to be taken after a configuration push Set to 1 to restart the controller after a full database push Default O disables automatic restart Enables SW P 02 protocol over IP control Note The default setting for this parameter is Enabled so if the parameter is missing or commented out it will still be enabled Port used for TCP IP server connection Default port is 2000 Port used for UDP broadcast messages for connecteds Default port is 2001 Port used for UDP broadcast messages for status 6 changes Default port is 2002 Multi cast address used for connecteds Default address is 224 1 1 1 Multi cast address used for status 6 changes Default address is 224 1 1 2 Time in milliseconds on SC12 SC13 seconds on 2450 that the link remains open after the last message is received A value of O causes the link to remain open indefinitely Default is 60000 60 1 minute Page 197 2013 Snell Limited Workbench WWW snellgroup com Controll
280. screen displays Fa GPIs Editor o mesa Number of GPIs 4 Change all to Input Operation Pulsing Interval ms Operation Pulsing Interval ms Operation Pulsing Interval ms Operation Pulsing Interval ms OK Cancel Apply Fig 78 GPls Editor Screen To add GPls 1 Enter a value in the Number GPIs field at the top of the screen and click the Apply button For each GPI a separate row is displayed to the editor Specify the Mode from the drop down list in the GPI row either input or Output for each of the GPls If all GPIs are to be set the same use the Change all to field at the top of the screen and select the mode from the drop down list Specify the Operation from the drop down list in the GPI row either Pulsing or Latching for each of the GPls If all GPIs are to be set the same use the Change all to field at the top of the screen and select the operation from the drop down list Determine an interval for each GPI in milliseconds When a hardware control panel is in one of the BPX modes it includes a joystick override feature that allows the GPI to be used as inputs See GPI Overrides on page 177 Tielines Device A Tie Line device represents a series of physical cables that connect multiple destinations on one level of a matrix to multiple sources on a anoth
281. section 8 5 Click on a screen to open that tabbed window Alternatively click on the relevant window tab Table 38 Toolbar Buttons 8 3 Menu When in edit mode performing a right click on a device opens an editing menu Delete Selected Deletes the current selection Edit Pins Edit the connecting pins for the current device Show all attached cables Display all cables attached to devices Show cables attached on left Display pins connected the left of the selected device Show cables attached on right Display pins connected the right of the selected device Show cables attached on top Display pins connected the top of the selected device Show cables attached on bottom Display pins connected the bottom of the selected device Properties Opens the Property window for the current selection Screen Properties Opens the Property window for the current drawing 8 4 Device Types Device types are templates for devices that specify information on a type of device To create a new device type 1 Select the Device Types tab bottom right of the window 2 Right click and select Add New Device Type The Device Editor displays see Fig 126 Page 137 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com System Architecture Device Type Editor Name Vistek 6406 Description HD Up Down Cross Converter Eis routing device Name Pin Type HD SDI IP 1 Input HD SDI IP 2 Input SYNC Input REF IP Input HD SDI OP
282. ser Account Control 5 Click Yes to continue 6 The Windows Installer screen may display during the installation process Page 15 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation Windows Y Installer V 5 0 7601 17514 msiexec Option lt Required Parameter gt Optional Parameter Install Options lt package i gt lt Productmsi gt Installs or configures a product la lt Productmsi gt Tu Administrative install Installs a product on the network lt ulm gt lt Productmsi gt t lt Transform List gt g lt Language ID gt Advertises a product m to all users u to current user lt uninstall x gt lt Productmsi ProductCode gt Uninstalls the product Display Options quiet Quiet mode no user interaction passive Unattended mode progress bar only Jolnlbidtt Sets user interface level n No UI b Basic Ul r Reduced UI II Fig 11 Windows Installer Screen 7 Click OK The installation continues 8 The end user license agreement EULA displays Please review the license terms before installing Snell Centra Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENCE RIGHTS The following provisions shall apply with respect to software supplied by Snell Limited Snell to the Buyer and any purchasers of such software from the Buyer The Buyer shall procure that any such purchasers are bound by these provisions 1 Snel
283. sers d Video 72X72 Video 72X72 Video 72X72 PNL1 14 6708 PNL1 15 6276 IO PNL1 16 6707 24x12 X Y MONITOR 16X16 X Y Fig 38 Screen Permissions Permission has three levels Read The basic level of access allowing read only permission lt is required for visibility in Run mode e Edit Enables screen modification in Design mode e Delete Allows the user to remove the screen To allocate a permission check the appropriate box Selecting Edit automatically selects Read permissions and selecting Delete automatically selects Read and Edit permissions Page 40 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Administration 4 5 Controller Permissions The Controller Permissions tab is for assigning access to the different controllers on the system Permission can be allocated to a Role or to individual users TZ EIERE Centra Workbench user BE r y Users Roles Screen Permissions Controller Permissions Locking Data Management Sequence Sets Identity L Users Roles oa eh eh a ax AN AN AN FAN Name V Edit BR Push RB Pull i oy ie 1 wW ds Ee RI Es a AE amp admin d E Y amp user d i i 2330 1 Dual 2330 2 Dual 2330 3 MV 2330 4 CentraS VR CentraSVR ICE 3 pe ee eae EI F i Control UMDs Alarms 2 VDCP 3 J q E Fieldstore Everyone e 3 Users d s i A A A j j l y
284. set Key Panel Lock X X X XXXXXXXXXX 2 XxX Xx Xx gt XX Xx Xx gt 2 XX Xx Xx gt lt x XK Passive default X X X X X X X X X x x x x Pause Play Preset All x X Previous X X x x Previous Chain xX Previous Page xX X X X X X X X X Protect X X X X X x X X Protect Lamp x x x Recall Position X Refresh X Refresh Clips X Remove X Replace X Reverse Chain Tested lt x X XxX X Route Salvo x X x x x X X xX X Table 60 Button Behaviors Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 233 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 E 2 4 Behavior Salvo amp Screen Salvo Snapshot Salvo Toggle Screen Screen Alias Select From Monitor Select Play Port Selected Alarm Shuitle Snapshot Editor Snapshot Run Snapshot Save Source Source Alias Source Group Source Select Source Track Stop Store Position Tab Page Take Take Next Take Previous Toggle Button Behavior Track Preset Undo Take VAR Table 60 CheckBox www snellgroup com o 3G Oo o E c gt gt oo XK a se 112 Dis EE OOO aa KC ye GO OO OO o o 0o DdD oo AM o H D S KAES eh st si si st st OC xX X xX X X X X X K XK IX X X X X X XK X xX X xX A X X xX X X A X xX X Xx X X X X X X X K XK X xX xX X Xx xX X Xx XX Button Behaviors YN co A X En N X O A 23 gt gt m lt Se Oo o o Se OI OI o SA AAA lp ooo Oo 8 o o Gel c o p p eo ow o o o OEE TE Xx xX Xx xX
285. splays Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 19 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Installation 2 3 Finish the Installation 7 Snell Centra Setup Completing the Snell Centra Setup Wizard Snell Centra has been installed on your computer Click Finish to dose this wizard Fig 16 Completing Installation To stop Workbench starting immediately after installation uncheck the Launch Workbench checkbox e Click Finish See Start Workbench on page 28 2 4 Manually Installing Components 2 4 1 Configuration Helper Display The Configuration Helper graphically shows the installation status of the Workbench Components The Configuration Helper is also available from the Windows Start Menu Start All Programs Snell MCM Utilities Configuration Helper Each component has information about its status e Click on to expand each component s details e Click on 2 to close the component details The different components are listed in Table 2 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 20 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 2 4 2 2 4 3 www snellgroup com Installation Computer Displays information about the PC on which the Workbench is installed Microsoft Data Access Displays information about the MDAC such as installed yes no Components MDAC Version number and whether or not the MDAC installation meets the requirements of Workbench Visual C Redistributable Displays information about th
286. sync screen a Summary tab and separate button is available which when selected clicked displays an overview of the current frame sync configuration for all standards To setup frame synchronization for a specific standard 1 Select the relevant standard from the tabbed pages 720p60 Frame Offset Fig 165 Frame Sync Setup 2 Choose an input reference to synchronize to or allow to Lock to Input Delay The input reference must have the same frame rate as the frame sync to synchronize to 3 Select Freeze Frame or Black Screen as the action to take in case of data loss 4 Define the offset Frame Line and Pixel pixel only if synchronizing by line or by a delay in milliseconds as required The available offsets differ according to the standard being setup To enable frame synchronization 1 Determine if the synchronization is to be performed by Frame or by Line by clicking on the relevant button 2 Select the Audio Pre the audio will not be synchronized Post the audio is synchronized along with the video 3 Click on the Frame Sync Enabled button to turn it green Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 167 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 10 3 Routing All audio whether embedded or discrete AES or MADI is considered as mono channels for processing and all can be routed independently of or with video Routing of audio can be performed as follows Source Destina
287. t Manipulation Font Colour WW Default blac Brushes Override Salvo Protects e Height 60 Font Colour EB Default blac Bru Font Family Arial X Swap Mode E Width 60 Font Family Arial Font Size 14 Font Weight v Use Salvos 1 S Text Manipulation Font Size 1 WM Use TieLines a Font Colour EB Default blac Bru i f AAA el Text alignment Left Font Family Arial kt No wrap mE a Vertical e Font Weight Normal Alignment Fig 106 Property Window The behaviors available for each individual control such as a button depend on the Group behavior For example if the Alarm behavior is selected for a Group then the behaviors available to the controls within that Group are only those relating to Alarms For details about the behaviors available with each Group see Appendix E Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 119 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 9 6 9 1 www snellgroup com Design Mode Device Explorer The device explorer is used to view the DCCP values for all controllers and devices To view the properties of a device at the bottom right of the window select the Device Explorer tab see Fig 107 Controllers b Qj Peat 127 0 0 1 3000 i i PyxishES1446144Refl 172 31 9 115 3000 al GQ Pyudsinaloguedudio283x288MonoRefi 172 31 9 117 3000 Lei Version gt 9 RouterController a Lei Config2450 d Aa InputPorts d 7 InputPorts 1 TAnalogueAudiolnput d Gei TAnalogueAudiolnput C BaselnputP
288. t Monitor Module Input Modules x12 each side of the Alarm Module Control Fan out Modules x2 Audio Crosspoint Modules x1 or x2 Crosspoint Modules x5 Multiviewer O P Modules x2 Nucleus Controllers x2 Output Modules x12 each side of the Controllers O P Monitor Module Fig 195 Sirius 850 Card Locations Front View Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 212 2013 Snell Limited Workbench C 2 1 1 Expansion Modules XPT 1 XPT 2 XPT RI XPT 3 XPT 4 MV Output 1 MV Output 2 MV XPT 1 Input Row and Fan Controllers Audio XPT XPT 1 XPT 2 XPT RI XPT 3 XPT 4 Outputs and Monitor q ve DN oi W LO ve DN oi W LO WN CO o o OO S amp S Table 51 Sirius 850 Slot Mo 146 2 147 3 O 148 4 st O O 149 5 5 01 N 150 6 152 8 151 153 9 or 00 0 O N 00 0 233 102 6 103 7 104 8 111 Redundant Crosspoint Module Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 213 105 9 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Controller Module Addresses 154 10 10 11 106 10 155 11 11 107 11 156 12 12 12 237 108 12 198 199 202 200 201 246 247 245 4 238 2 13 14 15 16 17 N 18 193 194 197 195 196 q dule Address Locations 157 13 13 14 15 16 17 18 109 13 158 14 110 14 159 15 111 15 160 16 112 16 161 17 234 113 17 162 18 114 18 Routers Reference oO CO e DN DO st se ON DN ON ON o M st o on o
289. t this ensure the log client is running if UDP logging has been enabled Logging information sent on a UDP port can be gathered with the Database Log Pump Page 172 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 13 Mimic Diagrams The following example is a simple single matrix architecture with two video servers as inputs and two multiviewers as outputs Fig 171 shows the inputs and outputs Fig 171 Pin Editor Mimic Six re entrant modular devices are connected to the router see Fig 172 Fig 172 Re entrant Modular Devices A 13 1 Inputs Each of the multiviewer outputs is connected to the router Each output is set to display individually on the mimic diagram The mimic tab is used to set up how each pin displays on the mimic 1 Check the Show on Mimic checkbox to display the pin as a block 2 Enter a category in the edit box to help organise the pins see Fig 173 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 173 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 13 2 Outputs Each of the multiviewer inputs are set up to be outputs of the example system This is done in exactly the same way as for the server outputs see Fig 173 Aa Pin Editor Pin connections for device Names and Connections Display Mimic Name Directior Signal Pz Show on SRV1 OP1 Output 0 Server 1 SRV1 OP2 Output 0 Server 1 SRV1 OP3 Output Server 1 SRV1 OP4 Cutput Server 1 SMS A
290. tatus and Checksum icons show that the controller required further configuration see section 5 9 1 Create a simulator controller which is convenient for design purposes before pushing the configuration to a hardware controller see section 5 9 2 5 4 2 Edit Controller Configuration To edit the controller configuration either double click on a controller or click the Edit Controller Config button The Controller Configuration window displays see Fig 46 For RollCall Gateway controllers double clicking on the controller or clicking the Edit Controller Config button displays the Generic Configuration Editor Fa Controller Configuration Coen routers toca Router Hardware Generic Sirius 840 Sirius 840 IP Address 172 31 9 118 Port 2007 i Add Remove Devices Assigned Devices Configuration PanelDevice RouterDevice Local Router Configuration Fig 46 Controller Configuration The Controller Configuration screen displays with the Devices tab open Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 51 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration The Tabs at the top of this screen are Devices Most controllers have default devices already selected If there are no devices selected they must be added before configuration can begin See Configuring Additional Devices on page 85 Routers Basic configuration of the router See Configuring a Router on page 52
291. te Out 38400 8 NONE 1 Controller Kramer Out 9600 8 NONE 1 Controller RS232 DTE Table 13 Default Comms Protocols Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 57 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 9 5 4 2 www snellgroup com Configuration Protocol Baud Data Parit Stop RS422 Port Mode Rate Bits Y Bits Simulated Out No electrical setup parameters Local Control ETL Matrix 19200 8 NONE 1 Controller Leitch Harris Pass Through In 9600 8 NONE 1 Device GVGES Control In 38400 8 ODD 1 Device GVGES Control Out 38400 8 ODD 1 Controller Barco Rosa In 19200 8 NONE 1 Controller Table 13 Default Comms Protocols H An RS422 crossover cable is required for this connection IP Port Properties Description Controller Type Select the router controller type from the drop down list Single Dual Select whether the controller is a Single or Dual device IP Address primary The IP address of the device IP Port primary The port number of the device IP Address secondary The IP address of the secondary device Dual mode only IP Port Secondary The port number of the secondary device Dual mode only Table 14 IP Port Configuration The General Switcher In protocol over IP for the Nucleus 2450 controller is configured in the separate initialization file See Configuration Initialization File on page 197 Matrix Ports The Matrix Ports tab makes it possible to map the logical arrangement of signals defined in the Matrix and Levels to
292. the Tie Line Editor screen Behaviour S Behaviour EN Configuration Controller TieLineController Takes Required Single Undo Timeout 10 Use Association Names Use Names From Assigned Level Index Range Destination Lock Name User Locking Enabled Name Tie Lines Fig 185 Group Behavior Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 182 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 18 Router Follow The source or destination selection of a group can be configured to follow the source or destination selection of one or more other routing groups For example an Audio Processing behavior may be configured to follow the source or destination selection of a Router Dial up behavior When a source or destination on a routing group changes any following groups automatically change accordingly The followed groups reflect the change immediately if the followed group is on the same screen or reflect the change at the point when a screen containing the followed groups displays To set up a router follow 1 Open the Group properties of a router screen 2 Click on the Follow Selection Configure button The Follow Selection screen displays Ta Follow Selection Configuration ER y La x Add 4 Follow routing selection Fig 186 Router Follow 3 Click on the Add button A new configuration row is added in the main area of the screen 4 Inthe new configura
293. the physical inputs and outputs of the routers e To add a Matrix Port select the Matrix and Level and click Add Port An entry displays in the Matrix Ports list see Fig 54 a Port Configuration o 1 Jee Serial IP Port Configuration Matrix Ports Levels Matrix Ports S850V Video 2 Level 2 S850A Level 3 ied tt Level 4 lt Remove Port Matrix Port Port COM3 Matrix 1 Level 1 Start Dest 1 End Dest 504 Dest Off 0 Source Off 0 Port Editor Matrix Port 1 Port LocalControl Start Dest 1 End Dest 1292 Dest Offset 0 Src Offset 0 Matrix 1 Monitor Offset 0 Port Feature Src Off 0 Level 1 Mon Input Off 0 Audio Params Protects Connect On Go Tally Dump External Protect Master Assign Defaults Sync Port sl Push Names to Aurora Ok Cancel Apply Fig 54 Matrix Ports Page 58 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration e Highlight the matrix port to edit and define the port properties according to the following Port Start Destination End Destination Destination Offset Source Offset Matrix Level Monitor Offset Monitor Input Offset Port Features Source Offset Audio Params Protects Connect On Go Tally Dump Assign Defaults Sync Port Push Names to Aurora Description Select a COM port number that communicates with the router from the drop down list
294. tion Audio embedded in video Audio embedded in video Audio embedded in video Discrete AES audio Discrete AES audio Audio embedded in video Discrete AES audio Discrete AES audio Table 42 Possible Audio Routes A 10 3 1 Audio Routing Route audio channels using a standard XY panel i ben SES Fig 166 Audio Routing To navigate directly to the Video Routing screen e Click on the Video XY button Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 168 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 10 3 2 Video Routing Route video using a standard XY panel lt i m e E 5 TE tu Prewri Lies Taik AA Wien a ien am Wf E tanda ben a mains aia on been bel imma inma mitana toma tum kenen bell buffen el Fig 167 Video Routing To navigate directly to the Audio Routing screen e Click on the Audio XY button A 10 3 3 Video with Audio Track Routing Route audio tracks onto video so that the new audio is embedded into the video on output Destinations Lech AI AS 14141911 900111 AAA ATI Fig 168 Video with Audio Track Routing Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 169 2013 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Worked Examples To route audio tracks onto video Select a destination The In Use tally displays the current audio track selection Select a new source Click on the Track Preset button Click the button
295. tion Controls Page 94 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 8 2 Online Editor The Online Editor displays the current configuration status of the live system It is mainly used for diagnostic purposes to identify failures Important Any changes made to the configuration in the Online Editor occur in real time on a live controller It is generally recommended that configuration changes are made using the Generic Editor The Online Editor must be also used for auto detection of modular systems 5 8 3 Checksum The Checksum button when clicked displays the Checksum Information screen The information displayed in this screen is mainly for diagnostic purposes e Click the Interrogate button and the checksum information for the current controller displays aa Checksum Information o mea Interrogate Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 2423218840 localChecksum 3093426416 Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 2423218840 localChecksum 3093426416 oid Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 2212678001 localChecksum 2328500724 oid 1 Devices Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 3290086980 localChecksum 1462319781 oid 1 2 ArrayField Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 44269349 localChecksum 1351986221 oid 1 2 4 RouterDevice Controller 127 0 0 1 2007 proxyChecksum 952827634 localChecksum 3805815723 oid 1 2 4 2 Comms Controller 127 0 0 1 2007
296. tion row select a router screen to follow from the Screen drop down list 5 Select the group on that screen to follow from the Group drop down list 6 Determine whether it is sources destinations or both that re to be followed Select from the Follow selection type drop down list 7 Check the Follow routing selection checkbox Unchecking the Follow routing selection checkbox allows the router follow to be left configured without actually following the router To remove a router follow e Select the row to remove click on the area outside of the drop down lists and click on the Remove button Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 183 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 19 Configure Dynamic UMDs To configure dynamic UMDs to follow tie line routes a minimum of two controllers are required configured for the following devices e A Router device e A Tie lines device A UMD Engine device e A UMD Driver device A 19 1 Configure the Controllers In this example two controllers are used to configure the devices More controllers may be used if required At least two 2330 246x PC controllers are required as a Tie line device cannot be on the same controller as a Router device Similarly a UMD engine cannot be on the same controller as Tie line device or a UMD device Controller 1 Router and UMD Engine 1 Add a controller and configure it as a Router device 2 From the Devices tab in the C
297. tively sources and destinations can be automatically assigned See Add Buttons to Link Panels on page 150 A 2 8 Add Buttons to Link Panels Add buttons on each of the XY panels to link to the BPX router panel and from the BPX panel to each of the XY panels Fig 145 Link Panels z5 bes ke DES Qrroon 2 kg kend bag ke Workbench 1 2 3 1 2 Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 150 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 3 Alarm Soft Panel An alarm panel is useful for example to indicate the status of router fans and PSUs Any unit failing is immediately obvious from the screen and action can then be taken Fig 146 shows an example alarm panel Alarm Screen L Alarms Fan 1 Fan 2 PSU 1 PSU 2 Fan 3 Fan 4 PSU 3 PSU 4 Fig 146 Alarm Screen A 3 1 Create New Screen 1 Open the Workbench Design window By default the first time the Design window is opened the first screen in the list is shown Subsequently the design view displays the default screen 2 Atthe bottom right of the window select the Screens Editor tab 3 Either on the Screens Editor tab click the Add button or on the toolbar click the Lo button The Add New Screen dialog box displays Type a name for the new screen for example Alarm Screen and click OK The new screen is added to the list To open any screen in the list double click on the thumbnail
298. to 1 For maximum compatibility and reliability set this value to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 address This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 subnet mask This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 address of the default gateway This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 address of the domain name server This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 The UseDHCP parameter is used to specify if the Nucleus controller should obtain an IP address via DHCP as opposed to the address specified in the ini file If this is set to 1 then the IP address of the controller is assigned by the local DHCP server and the IPAddress SubNetMask DefaultGateway and DNSAddress settings in the ini file are ignored If it is set to 0 then the ini file settings is used If UseDHCP is not specified in the ini file then it defaults to 1 The UseSNMP flag enables or disables the SNMP features on the controller card If set to O no SNMP features are activated on the card If set to 1 the SNMP features are activated subject to the restrictions in the next section Note If this changes the card requires a restart If this entry is omitted from the ini file it defaults to 0 The Version variable is the text that is returned when the sysDescr SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1
299. to Text tally 4 For each tally from the property window change the Destination Association and Level so that it has the same destination as the button above it The Tally shows the Source name set in the Controller Configuration Router properties Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 145 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples A 1 1 11 Save the Screen e From the toolbar click the A button To set the screen as a default from the Administration page select the screen from the Initial Screen drop down list see section 4 2 A 1 1 12 Test the Screen 1 Select Run from the main menu It can take several seconds for the panel to communicate with the controller 2 Click one of the destination buttons the button changes color 3 Select a source the source button changes to a dim light 4 Click the Take button to route the selection the source button changes to a bright color When switching between destinations the source button changes with the active source A 1 2 Clone Panel Without a Take Button Copy and edit the screen created in see section A 1 1 so that it does not have a Take button In this case selecting a destination and then pressing the source also routes the signal Screen 2 QP 0001 O P 0002 OP 0003 O P 0004 Fig 140 XY Panel Without a Take Button 1 At the bottom right of the window select the Screens Editor tab Right click on the screen and select Clone Screen The Enter
300. to display on a UMD The text can be grouped into logical groups UMDs can be linked together so that the text simultaneously changes when the group is applied each UMD must have a different Header number which is selected through a switch on the front of the UMD To add a new group 1 Click the Add Group button A new group is added to the list see Fig 80 2 3 8 UMD Driver Editor o 1 Jee UMD Group s Serial Communication Details COM Port COM1 Audio Group 1 SerialComms 107 2 Ml ProBelSWP04 D Baud Rate br38400 Data Bits db8 Parity EvenParity Stop Bits OneStopBit UMD Array Item s UMD Address Caption Alignment Brightness Group Name Video Group 1 Comm Type IPComms 107 3 Protocol Undefined Audio 1 Audio 2 Audio 3 Remove selected group Add new group Export to CSV Import from csv Remove UMD Add UMD ox 1 Gg aen Fig 80 UMD Driver Editor Type a Group Name Select the Comms Type from the drop down list The options change depending on the selection there is no automatic check for valid COM ports Select the Protocol from the drop down list For each UMD in the group click Add UMD An entry is added to the list Enter the UMD Address Each UMD must have a unique address See the UMD manufacturer s documentation for details Type the Caption Text to display its Alig
301. tor tab is shown Subsequently the design view displays with the default initial screen see section 4 2 6 2 Toolbar The toolbar buttons are listed in Table 29 Button Description Edit Toggle the edit mode of the screen Save Saves the changes to the current screen New Screen Opens the new screen wizard allowing creation of a new blank screen customized video XY routing screen or customized audio XY routing screen see section 6 4 Export Exports the screen to transportable XML see section 6 4 3 Import Imports a screen from transportable XML see section 6 4 3 y Table 29 Toolbar Buttons Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 106 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Design Mode Button Description Screens Lists the screens available as tabbed windows at the right hand side of the design area e Device Explorer see section 6 9 e Property Window see section 6 8 e Screens Editor see section 6 4 2 S e Panel Templates see section 6 5 3 e Key Names see section 6 10 e Sequences Editor see section 6 11 e Toolbox only available in edit mode see section 6 7 Click on a screen to open that tabbed window Alternatively click on the relevant window tab Undo Ctrl Z Create Grid Creates a grid of controls for example a button keypad see section A 1 1 5 All of the items in the Toolbox can be placed individually or in a grid array Zoom Adjusts the magnification view of the screen
302. troller s IP address and SNMP details lt COnr 12 lt 1 PS lt Adapter gt lt Number gt 0 lt Number gt lt DHCP gt false lt DHCP gt lt Address gt 10 1 0 10 lt Address gt lt Port gt 2007 lt Port gt lt SubNetMask gt 255 255 254 0 lt SubNetMask gt lt DefaultGateway gt 0 0 0 0 lt DefaultGateway gt lt Adapter gt lt IP gt lt RollCall gt lt Enabled gt false lt Enabled gt lt StartupDelay gt 5 lt StartupDelay gt lt SharePort gt 2050 lt SharePort gt lt BridgePort gt 2600 lt BridgePort gt lt BridgeRemoteAddress gt 128 1 1 1 lt BridgeRemoteAddress gt lt BridgeAutoConnect gt false lt BridgeAutoConnect gt lt Name gt Router lt Name gt lt Informati onl gt Intel lt informationl gt lt Iinformation 2 gt Info2 lt Information2 gt lt NetNibbles gt 1000 lt NetNibbles gt lt UseLongNames gt false lt UseLongNames gt lt RoLlitall gt lt SNMP gt lt Enabled gt false lt Enabled gt lt Contact gt Snell Employee lt Contact gt lt Location gt Test Lab lt Location gt lt SysName gt Test System lt SysName gt lt EnableSnellTraps gt true lt EnableSnellTraps gt lt DisablelnitialNotify gt true lt DisablelnitialNotify gt lt TrapManagers gt lt Addresse gt 112 3L 1 133 lt Address gt lt Address gt 172 3L 7 134 lt Addr ses gt lt Address gt 112 3L 7 135 lt Address gt lt TrapManagers gt lt CommunityGetNames gt lt Name gt getonly lt Name gt lt CommunityGetNa
303. ttom of the Window 4 Click Set 5 Repeat for the second safe source and click OK A 17 3 Configure a Soft Panel for Tie lines The soft panel will require four groups one for each of the three controllers and a miscellaneous one for label lines etc The following behaviors should be assigned to each group Standard router XY on Matrix 1 controller with text tallies on the Tie line management section indicating tie line output Standard router XY on Matrix 2 controller with forward tallies in the Tie line Management section indicating tie line input Group Behavior Group Content Matrix 1 Router XY ports Matrix 2 Router XY ports Tie line Multi Matrix Miscellaneous Passive Source and destination buttons in the Multi Matrix section and Clear Tie line buttons in the Tie line Management section Lines labels and backgrounds that don t point to a controller Page 181 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Worked Examples Matrix 1 Matrix 2 S SNE I P 0001 O P 0001 Aear IIe O P 0002 I P 0002 O P 0003 I P 0003 Port 73 Safe Source Fig 184 Example Tie lines Soft Panel A 17 3 1 Assign Specific Tie lines to the Soft Panel In the soft panel used for managing the tie lines a link must be made to the relevant tie lines setup in the Tie line Editor screen Using the soft panel example in the next section as a guide set the Locked parameter to the Owner Lock name setup in
304. ue 1 Rev 4 Page 132 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Rules 7 6 Actions Actions determine what to do when a Rule s Output value is TRUE There are five types of Action e Set Value The Rule sets a DCCP to a specific value see 7 4 1 3 e Copy Value The Rule copies a DCCP value from one location to another see 7 4 1 3 e Call Function The Rule calls a function with the specified parameters if any see 7 6 1 e Application The Rule starts an application e DCCP Increment Value The Rule adds a value positive or negative to a DCCP value It can also increment dates units days and times units seconds The default action is to Fire when the Output is TRUE The color of the Action is Yellow Selecting the Active Low checkbox sets the Rule to Fire when the Output changes from TRUE to FALSE The color of the Action is Red 7 6 1 Functions A Function Rule can reset a controller If a controller is set as a Router or Tie lines device there are additional options Tie lines Function Description Reset Resets the hardware on the controller card ClearTielines Routes a safe source to a tie line destination MakeRouteNative Makes a route over tie lines MakeRouteNativeLocked Makes a route over tie lines with locking MakeRoute Makes a route over tie lines MakeRouteLocked Makes a route over tie lines with locking Table 34 Tie lines Functions Router Function Description Reset Resets the h
305. uechanged Input2 Delay Input Name after 0 Inputl after 10 Is Equal To Equal to Compare with Threshold Tapoti LO Equal to Compare with Each Other Inputl Input 2 Greater Than Greater Than Compare with Threshold Input1 gt 10 Greater Than Compare with Each Other Inputil gt Input 2 Less Than Less Than Compare with Threshold Inputl lt 10 Less Than Compare with Each Other Input lt Input 2 AND Condition 1 and Condition 2 Inputl 10 and Inputz 2U NOT not Condition not Inputl 10 OR Condition 1 or Condition 2 Inputil LO or Inputz 20 Table 36 Operator Syntax A Logic string can be copied from one Rule and pasted into another Rule However the two Rules must have the same Inputs Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 134 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Rules 7 8 Rules Service The Rules Service is an application that runs independently from Workbench Multiple instances of the Rules Service can run together each of which can run specific Rules or sets of Rules In order for the rules to be active the Rules Service must be running Start the Rules Service from the Windows Start menu Start All Programs Snell MCM Rules Service W Centra Rules Service E On Rules E O Alarm Rules O New Folder EN JE Router Flip Flop O Signal Path Rules E Kai P Oz Rules y H Oz Display Name Test Err
306. up on the panel use the Group drop down list to select the group for which key sequences need to be configured Automatic Key Sequences 1 In the Key Sequence Editor select a group number from the Group drop down list 2 Click on the Tools button a Sequences Tools L le x Routing Generic Auto Sequence Matrix Mag X Pin Type Sort by index z v Auto sequence source associations di Auto sequence destination associations Source Assocs Dest Assocs Merge assignments Numeric Auto Sequence Mnemonic Auto Sequence Delimiter Fig 111 Sequence Tools 3 Check the Auto sequences checkboxes for source associations and destination associations as required Page 122 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 6 11 2 2 www snellgroup com Design Mode To create Numeric sequences Click on the Numeric Auto Sequence button All possible sequences within the matrix are generated using the keypad numbers for example 1 gt 0 gt 0 1 gt 1 gt 0 1 gt 1 gt 1 2 gt 0 gt 0 etc To create Mnemonic sequences Click on the Mnemonic Auto Sequence button All possible sequences within the matrix are generated using the keypad numbers and named buttons for example VTR gt 1 gt 1 VTR gt 2 gt 0 VTR gt 2 gt 1 EDIT gt 1 etc Sequences often contain more than one association for example
307. uration JS EE eebe Property Edtor Property Wumdow Push and Pull Configuration Push QUIN Ou cria Pyxis Module Locatons Routers cocooccccnncnccnncnccnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnn Sample Database 0000nnnno00000nn R Radio Buttons Example oooocccccccccc Hecdhundanmcy coococccnnncconnnccncnnnccnnanennnnncnnnos Reference AUDO WE ele EE 63 ROSE E Restore MEI Sie o A EE Eege Membership ccccoocnncnnnncccconcccnncnnnnnnos RollCall Controller cceceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 48 Generic Editor SOC Scion ci Router Configuration cccccccccccccconccnnnnnnnnnos Hardware Confg Page 250 Index MOUM scier eea credo ieii 168 AUA ie acess seceeceeeceacteneteceasetenubees 168 o ee ee A 169 EE 128 Service eeiesersuddnaiadossctarsteacmmnmmacciades 135 SS 135 TOG DAW EEN 129 MOOD OK srren 129 Rules Menu 128 S Safe Source cris cacao 75 Salvos CGonfouration 53 Sample Panels EE ege 209 Sample Rate Conversion ccccccccc 165 Screen Design Mode ooccccccoccccnccccncnoccnnnnnnos 108 Templates cccccececceeeeeeseeeeeeees 111 Screens Permissions E 40 Sequence Gets 84 Serial Port Configuration cccoooomm 56 163 Sirius Module Locations ccn 214 Snapshot EOE ae E E 101 GA o A nipona 103 Eeer 102 Soft Panels ccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 108 112 DPA eee e rer tre 148 ne 175 DON E 143 Special Function Keys 222 SQL Databases occcconcccncn
308. urces may be accessed from the same size keypad The source keypads on 6276 6277 panels are used to pre select sources not route them These panels have lt TAKE gt buttons to confirm the selections The pressed button either illuminates if it has a valid associated source association index or has alphanumerics to display the name of the selected source association Panel Swap Mode Panel Swap Mode is available for 6276 and 6277 panels When activated in the database it causes the taken source and the preselected source to swap or interchange and therefore allows the previously taken source to be re routed with another TAKE This could be considered to be an undo facility for quickly reverting to the previous selection This feature is currently supported on a 2450 controller only Page 224 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Hardware Panels Reference D 2 14 Override Salvo Protects D 2 15 D 2 16 This mode is only available for the 6276 XY panel and is configured in the panel details When enabled any Salvos fired from this panel overrides any system protects from whatever source they have been applied This ensures that all crosspoints configured in a Salvo is always set Enabling this mode automatically enables the Master mode This feature is not currently supported Mask with Destination This mode is available with all XY panels including the 6276 and any 6700 series panels con
309. users to the roles The Users not in Role list shows those users that are not members of the selected role but that may be assigned to it To add members to a role 1 Inthe list of roles on the left side of the window click on the role to assign members to 2 Use the arrow buttons lt and gt to move members to and from the role as required A user can belong to any number of Roles the permissions are combined Page 39 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com 4 4 Screen Permissions Administration The Screen Permissions tab is for assigning access to the different screens on the system Permission can be allocated to a Role or to individual users 0 ii d DATE a DA Centra Workbench user Users Roles Screen Permissions Controller Permissions Locking Data Management Sequence Sets Identity Se Lon Video A 2 Video 72x72 PNL1 2 6277 80 Video 72x72 PNL1 3 6277 60 VIDEO 72X72 PNL1 4 6277 40 PNL1 5 6277 20 PNL1 6 6709 BPX PNL1 7 6705 BPX boo o H Video 72X72 Video 72X72 Video 72X72 m Y Read Y Edit Y Delete d d Ei d d d d d d d d d d d d gt Video 2X72 Video 2X72 User Roles PNL1 11 6705 PNL1 12 6706 PNL1 13 6706 32X4 X Y 48X4 X Y 32x16 X Y Name 3 admin amp user e 3 Administrators _ S verons 3a U
310. v 4 To view or edit the properties of a device open the property editor tab bottom right of the window Some properties are specific to the selected device in the drawing such as the size show pin names show description and so on The Device Settings properties apply to all instances of the device for example color controller mimic settings etc Fig 130 Example Device Properties Pin Editor To edit the pins for a device right click and select Edit Pins The Pin Editor displays Each pin has an icon that indicates its type see Table 39 Icon Type gt Input d Output Ol Two Way Table 39 Pin Types Names and Connections The Names and Connections tab is for changing pin names and to managing connections to other devices see Fig 131 pg Pin Editor Pin connections for device Names and Connections Display Mimic Directior Connect Connected Device Connected Pin SYNC Input REF IP Input HD SDI OP E HD SDI OP 1 Output Y HD SDI OP 2 Output HD SDI LOOP Output SYNC OUT Output Associated with matrix on controller Fig 131 Pin Names and Connections Display The Display tab is used to change the way that pins are displayed for this particular block on the drawing Changes are made only to the selected block Select which pins are visible which edge they are displayed on and in what order Select multiple pins to apply
311. ve the ports automatically set to 3000 and 2050 respectively If the IP address and Port number are unknown e For the Nucleus Controller extract the CompactFlash from the controller and place it into a card reader to view the IP address from the Network ini file Refit the CompactFlash back into the controller e For the Centra Controller view the config xml file that is on the USB memory stick for the controller 6 If configuring a pair of controllers check the Create Pair checkbox and enter the details for the second controller 7 Click Next Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 49 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Configuration a Controller Wizard O Use A Factory Or User Default Router Type i Router Configuration S800 lof2 576x576 A Ref1_V3_12_2 DLT v Y Import information to allow editing of hardware panel configurations No Default Create a blank controller that needs building up for non router controllers i e tie lines UMDs Cancel 9 a Previous Next gt Finish Fig 43 Set Router Type 8 Click the radio button Use a Factory Or User Default No Default is used when installing a new system similar to a previously installed one The existing configuration is then copied as a basis for the configuration of the new controller 9 From the Router Type drop down list click the relevant router type 10 From the Router Configuration drop down
312. vices and panels for use with Workbench Configurations are stored as databases Sample databases are available to quickly get started with Workbench To open configuration mode log in as a user with Configuration permissions see section 4 3 Screen Layout Configured controllers display in the main part of the window To the right is a menu for configuring saving resetting etc the controllers These features are covered later in this section A pop up menu is also available with a right click when a controller is selected Sample Controllers If a sample database is installed see Appendix F the configuration screen lists several controllers see Fig 40 PS ii d BAEZ ae Centra Workbench admin yeep arg V o ES Connected Name IP Port Type a Primary Active Partner Controller Version E a Add Controller AS Cygnus 288x576 A Refl 172 31 9 201 3000 Controller2450 d Primary Unknown BB Edit Controller Config e Cygnus 288x576 B Ref1 172 31 9 202 3000 Controller2450 da Unknown EE Controller Settings SB Cygnus 576x576 A Ref1 172 31 9 202 3000 Controller2450 da Primary Unknown LS Generic Editor BS Cygnus 576x576 B Ref1 172 31 9 204 3000 Controller2450 Es Unknown Online Editor rp Ce Pyxis AA 144x144 Stereo 172 31 9 171 3000 Controller2450 da Primary Unknown J dereen E e Pyxis AA 144x144 Stereo 172 31 9 172 30
313. we ben wm af d EA ETTET wm sl lt Type Aurora F Type2330 v Controller Name Controller1 Fig 209 Aurora Nebula Importer Log File Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 246 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Databases When the import is complete the window lists all the items in the database that are imported 6 To save the log click Save Log The imported controllers are listed in Workbench Configuration mode F 5 Imported Data The following data is imported e Matrices e Levels e Sources e Source Associations if enabled in the legacy database e Destination Associations e Salvos e Panel configuration Defaulted Data e Destinations e Source Associations if disabled in the legacy database e Inhibits Issue 1 Rev 4 Page 247 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com index 2330 Controller ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 48 187 Configuration File 189 2450 Controller oooocccoccccncccncccn ccoo 48 191 Configuration Initialization File 197 Network Initialization File 194 246x Sid 200 246x Controller Configuration File 203 246x Controllers 200 A Active TC 46 Add a New Controller 48 Administration c ccccecceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 36 Alarm Device 88 elle dl 10 Architecture Menu 137 Audio Assignments cocccccconocnnnccnonnnn
314. wn SysName 2450 NumberCommunityGetNames 1 NumberCommunitySetNames 1 TrapManager 1 TrapManagerAddr1 1 72 31 7 133 CommunityGetNamel getonly CommunitySetNamel setonly FnableSnellTraps 1 TrapMessageDelay 100 DisablelnitialNotify 1 Disable0utputSignalTraps 1 DisablelnputSignalTraps 1 DisableCrossPointTraps 1 DisableProtectStateTraps 1 DisableSsrcAudioModifyTraps 1 DisableDestAudioModifyTraps 1 DisableFanFaultTraps 0 DisablePSUFaultTraps 0 Disable0utputStandardTraps 1 DisablelnputStandardTraps 1 DisableModuleTypeTraps 1 DisableModulePresentTraps 1 DisableControllerCommsTraps 1 DisableMonitorRowPortTraps 1 DisableMonitorRowIinputNotOutputTraps 1 Page 196 Controllers Reference O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Controllers Reference B 2 5 Configuration Initialization File The following entries are required in the Config ini file DEBUG TestMode 0 ROUTING Set_Delay 1 CONFIG ResetAfterConfigPush 1 O2overIP Enable true TCP_IP_Port 2000 UDP_Connect_Port 2001 UDP_Stat6 Port 2002 Connect_MC_addr 224 1 1 1 Stat6_MC_addr 224 1 1 2 TCP_IP_Link_Time 0 Issue 1 Rev 4 Internal testing only Set to 0 A delay in milliseconds before setting a crosspoint following the first crosspoint received The default is 1 disabled The purpose is to ensure multiple crosspoints sent serially are set on a single frame boundary For example if an external controller is setting two crosspoint
315. xisting configuration from a router want to create a new configuration to push to a controller that is on the network to add a controller for a new router I am working offline and want to create a new controller to use at a later time to configure a controller for future use Page 48 O 2013 Snell Limited Workbench www snellgroup com Configuration 5 4 1 1 To Configure a New Router on the Network 1 If not already selected select the second radio button want to create a new configuration to push to a controller that is on the network 2 Click Next Fs Controller Wizard Centra Controller 2330 246x PC Controller Name Router_Controller IP Address 192 168 3 1 d Create Pair Name Router_Controller_Slave IP Address 192 168 3 2 Note that a pair cannot be created for controllers running on a PC Cancel da Previous Next Let Finish Fig 42 Set Controller Name 3 Type a name for the controller 4 Edit the IP Address to match that set in the controller If the controller is running on the local PC use the localhost loop back IP address of 127 0 0 1 The system does not accept localhost as an IP address If the IP address is set to 127 0 0 1 other computers cannot access the controller To enable other computers to access the controller use the PC s actual IP address 5 Edit the Port number Centra Controller only Nucleus Controllers and RollMap Gateways ha
316. y is used as a source preset or destination clear key and is generally assigned to the bottom right key on the keypad of a 6276 or 6277 panel Controllable Destinations This applies to X Y panels only Any destination can be configured to be controllable default from a given X Y panel Routes may be viewed but cannot be changed Destination Keypads All X Y style panels have a destination keypad This is either button per destination BPD as on 1U XY panels or dial up multiple button presses as on 6276 panels These are configured in the database Press a destination button BPD or a sequence of buttons dial up to select a destination association The advantage of a dial up keypad is that many more destinations may be accessed from the same size keypad The pressed button either illuminates if it has a valid associated destination association index or has alphanumerics to display the name of the selected destination association On power up no destination button is selected so all destination buttons are extinguished and any destination displays on X Y panels are blank Source Keypads All control panels have a source keypad This is either a button per source BPS as on 1U panels or dial up multiple button presses as on 6276 6277 panels These are configured in the database Press a source button BPS or a sequence of buttons dial up to select a source association The advantage of a dial up keypad is that many more so
317. yone System Role Users Users System Role Description Administrators System Role System Role Permissions Allowed Available Configuration Administration Soft panel design Rules Advanced design Master System architecture Run mode Membership Users in Role Users not in Role user admin Add new role Delete role Fig 37 Roles Default Roles For a new installation there are three Roles see Table 6 Role Permissions Memberships Everyone No permissions are assigned admin user Users Run Mode only user Administrators Soft panel design admin Run Mode user Configuration Administration Table 6 Default Roles Add a New Role To add a new role 1 Click Add new role a new role named New Role 0 is added to the list of roles on the left side of the window In the Role Name field type a name for the new role For example Operators If required type a brief description of the role in the Description field Assign Permissions to the role g 2 WN Permissions to Workbench system functions are granted to roles as opposed to specific users The Permissions section on the Roles tab has two lists Allowed and Available Table 7 lists the actions for each permission Page 38 2013 Snell Limited Workbench Issue 1 Rev 4 www snellgroup com Administration Permission Administration Advanced Design Configuration

Workbench User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents